gkflhma-11 · 7. Hazard Warning Switch 8. Outside Temperature Switch 9. Passenger's Air Bag Off Indicator 10. Passenger's Air Bag 11.Fuse Box Relay 12.Hood Release Lever 13.Steering

2008

A010A02A-AAT

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE

Please consult your Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet for your vehicle's specificwarranty coverage.

A020A01A-AAT

RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE

The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the owner, it is your responsibilityto see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals.When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some operations.Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also included in Section 5.

F1

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However,Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continualproduct improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and explanationsof optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may find material in thismanual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

OWNER'S MANUAL

A030A01A-aAT

OperationMaintenanceSpecifications

F2

A070A01A-AAT

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safetyor durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportationand other federal or state agencies.

A080A01S-AAT

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for animproperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For thisreason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundaidealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

!

F3

A090A01A-AAT

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.These titles indicate the following:

WARNING:This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons ifthe warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION:This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution isnot heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

NOTE:This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

!

!

F4

A110A01A-AAT

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with many high technology, electronically controlled systems thathelp to ensure your vehicle operates properly and provides the performance that you expect. Thesesystems utilize computers to monitor the operation of various systems and components and help tocontrol their operation. These computerized system operations are wide-ranging and involvecomponents to reduce emissions, to continuously evaluate the readiness of the airbag and seat beltpretensioner systems, to determine when the airbag and seat belt pre-tensioner systems should bedeployed and then to activate the deployment, and if equipped, to operate anti-lock braking, tractioncontrol and electrical stability control to assist the driver to control the vehicle in difficult drivingsituations. These systems electronically store information that is useful to service technicians whenthey need to diagnose and repair these systems. Additional information is stored only when a crashoccurs that results in the deployment of the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioners. This type of data storageis done by devices called event data recorders (EDR).

After a crash event, the airbag and seat belt pre-tensioner computer system, known as the SupplementalRestraint System Control Module (SRSCM) or Airbag Control Unit (ACU), may record some informationabout the condition of the vehicle and how it was being operated. This information consists of datarelated to seat belt usage and if there was diagnostic information in the airbag or seat belt systemsat the time that a crash occurred, and if the ACU sensed that a crash of sufficient severity occurred torequire seat belt pre-tensioner or airbag deployment.

To retrieve this information, special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or the device thatstores the data is required. Hyundai will not access information about a crash event or share it withothers except:

o in response to an official request of police or similar government office, oro with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee, oro as part of Hyundai’s defense of litigation, oro as required by law.

F5

A040A01A-AAT

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people whodrive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of whichwe're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you readit carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundaidealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that maybe required.

A050A04A-AAT

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leavethe manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION:Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do notmeet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifica-tions listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual and which also appearin the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2007 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored inany retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai MotorCompany.

!

F6

A100A03A-AAT

GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same partsused by Hyundai Motor Company to manu-facture vehicles. They are designed andtested for the optimum safety, performance,and reliability to our customers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered andbuilt to meet rigid manufacturing require-ments. Using imitation, counterfeit or usedsalvage parts is not covered under theHyundai New Vehicle Limited Warranty orany other Hyundai warranty. In addition, anydamage to or failure of Genuine HyundaiParts caused by the installation or failure of

an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage partis not covered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchasingHyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo onthe package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to the UnitedStates are packaged with labels written onlyin English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold throughauthorized Hyundai Dealerships.

To find the closest authorized dealer call1-800-826-CARS

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

F7

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 5

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

10

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS &BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

F8

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

B250A02GK-AAT

OGK026002N

F9

1. Multi-Function Light Switch 2. Horn and Driver's Airbag 3. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 4. Ignition Switch 5. Front Fog Light Switch (If installed) 6. Digital Clock 7. Hazard Warning Switch 8. Outside Temperature Switch 9. Passenger's Air Bag Off Indicator10. Passenger's Air Bag

11.Fuse Box Relay12.Hood Release Lever13.Steering Wheel Tilt Lever14.Heating and Cooling Controls15.Ashtray16.Parking Brake Lever17.Shift Lever18.Cigarette Lighter19.Audio System (If installed)20.Glove Box

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster noron the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster,instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak ontothese areas, wash them with water immediately.

!

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

B255A02GK-AAT

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-48.

Malfunction Indicator Light

SRS (Airbag) Warning Light

Tail Gate Open Warning Light

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

Door Ajar Warning Light and Chime

ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If installed)

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

Parking Brake/ Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light

CRUISE Indicator Light (If installed)

Seat Belt Reminder Light and Chime

CRUISE SET Indicator Light (If installed)

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

Indicator Lights (If installed)

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Malfunction

Indicator

Low Tire Pressure Telltale

F10

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1Fuel Recommendations ................................................ 1-2Breaking in Your New Hyundai ..................................... 1-3Keys .............................................................................. 1-3Door (Theft-Alarm System) .................................... 1-4, 1-6Power Windows ............................................................ 1-9Seats ........................................................................... 1-10Seat Belts.................................................................... 1-16Child Restraint System ............................................... 1-22Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System (SRS) ..... 1-30Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ...................... 1-46Warning and Indicator Lights ...................................... 1-48Multi-Function Light Switch ......................................... 1-58Windshield Wiper/Washer ........................................... 1-60Sunroof ....................................................................... 1-66Mirror ........................................................................... 1-70Hood Release ............................................................. 1-73Cruise Control ............................................................. 1-79Audio Remote Control Switch ..................................... 1-83Heating and Cooling Control ....................................... 1-84Stereo Sound System ............................................... 1-102Antenna ..................................................................... 1-104Audio System............................................................ 1-105

1

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

2 FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS

CAUTION:Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited War-ranty may not cover damage to the fuelsystem and any performance problems thatare caused by the use of fuels containingmethanol or fuels containing MTBE (MethylTertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxy-gen Content 2.7% weight.)

B010B01A-AAT

What About Gasohol?

Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded gasolineand 10% ethanol or grain alcohol) may be usedin your Hyundai. However, if your engine devel-ops driveability problems, the use of 100%unleaded gasoline is recommended. Fuels withunspecified quantities of alcohol, or alcoholsother than ethanol, should not be used.

B010A02JM-AAT

Use Unleaded Gasoline

Unleaded gasoline with a Pump OctaneRating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91)or higher must be used in your Hyundai.

B010D01A-AAT

Do Not Use Methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) shouldnot be used in your Hyundai. This type of fuelcan reduce vehicle performance and damagecomponents of the fuel system.

!

OGK016100N

UNLEADEDFUEL ONLY

B010C01A-AAT

Use of MTBE

Hyundai recommends that fuels containingMTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0%vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) should notbe used in your Hyundai.Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (OxygenContent 2.7% weight) may reduce vehicle per-formance and produce vapor lock or hardstarting.! WARNING:

o Do not "top off" after the nozzle auto-matically shuts off when refueling.

o Tighten the cap until it clicks, otherwisethe " " light will illuminate.

o Always check that the fuel cap is in-stalled securely to prevent fuel spillagein the event of an accident.


3BREAKING IN YOUR NEWHYUNDAI

B010E01A-AAT

Gasolines for Cleaner Air

To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundai rec-ommends that you use gasolines treated withdetergent additives, which help prevent depositformation in the engine. These gasolines willhelp the engine run cleaner and enhance per-formance of the Emission Control System.

B010F01A-AAT

Operation in Foreign Countries

If you are going to drive your Hyundai in anothercountry, be sure to:

o Observe all regulations regarding registra-tion and insurance.

o Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

B020A01S-AAT

During the First 1,200 Miles (2,000 Km)

No formal "break-in" procedure is required withyour new Hyundai. However, you can contrib-ute to the economical operation and durability ofyour Hyundai by observing the following recom-mendations during the first 1,200 miles (2,000km).

o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/h).o While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm,

or revolutions per minute) between 2,000rpm and 4,000 rpm.

o Use moderate acceleration. Don't startquickly or depress the accelerator pedalfully.

o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try to avoidhard stops.

o Don't lug the engine (in other words, don'tdrive so slowly in too high a gear that theengine "bucks"-shift to a lower gear).

o Whether going fast or slow, vary your speedfrom time to time.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutesat one time.

o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200 miles(2,000 km) of operation.

KEYS

B030A01A-AAT

For greater convenience, the same key oper-ates all the locks in your Hyundai. However,because the doors can be locked without a key,carrying a spare key is recommended in caseyou accidentally lock one key inside the car.

OMC025001


4

WARNING:o Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Be-

fore you drive away (especially if thereare children in the car), be sure that all thedoors are securely closed and locked sothat the doors cannot be inadvertentlyopened from the inside. This helps en-sure that the doors will not be openedaccidentally. Also, when combined withthe proper use of seat belts, locking thedoors helps keep occupants from beingejected from the car in case of an acci-dent.

o Before opening the door, always look forand avoid oncoming traffic.

o In case of accident, the door is unlockedautomatically (If installed).

o An enclosed vehicle can become ex-tremely hot, causing death or severeinjury to unattended children or animalswho cannot escape the vehicle. Further-more, children might operate features ofthe vehicle that could injure them, orthey could encounter other harm, possi-bly from someone gaining entry to thevehicle. Never leave children or animalsunattended in your vehicle.

!

DOOR

B040A03Y-AAT

Door LocksB030C01Y-AAT

Illuminated Ignition Switch(If installed)

Whenever a door is opened, the ignition switchwill be illuminated for your convenience, pro-vided the ignition switch is not in the "ON"position.The light will go off approximately 10 secondsafter closing the door or when the ignition switchis turned on.

B030C01E-1

B030B01S-AAT

Record Your Key Number

A code number is stamped on the key numberplate that came with the keys to your Hyundai.This key number plate should be kept in a safeplace, not in the vehicle. The key number shouldalso be recorded in a place where it can be foundin an emergency.

If you need additional keys, or if you should loseyour keys, your authorized Hyundai dealer canmake new keys if you can supply the keynumber.

B030B01MC


5

B040C01S-AAT

Locking From the Outside

The doors can be locked without a key.To lock the doors first push the inside lockswitch to the "LOCK" position so that the redmark on the switch is not visible, then close thedoor.

NOTE:o When locking the door this way, be care-

ful not to lock the door with the ignitionkey left in the vehicle.

o To reduce the chance of theft, alwaysremove the ignition key, close all win-dows, and lock all doors when leavingyour vehicle unattended.

OGK046003

B040B01GK-AAT

Locking and unlocking front doors with akey

o The door can be locked or unlocked with akey.

o Lock the door by turning the key toward thefront of the vehicle and unlock it by turning thekey toward the rear.

NOTE:The driver's door can be unlocked by turn-ing the key once toward the rear. If you wishto unlock all doors, turn the key againtoward the rear within 4 seconds.

OGK046002

LOCK

UNLOCK

B040D01S-AAT

Locking From the Inside

To lock the doors from the inside, simply closethe door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK"position. When this is done, neither the outsidenor the inside door handle can be used.

NOTE:When the door is locked, the red mark on theswitch is not visible.

OGK046004L

UNLOCK LOCK


6

B070B02GK-AAT

Armed Stage

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm thesystem as described below.

1) Remove the ignition key from the ignitionswitch.

2) Make sure that the engine hood and tail gateare closed and latched.

3) Lock the doors using the transmitter of thekeyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, the turnsignal light will blink once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

OGK046003

B040G02GK-GAT

Central Door Lock

The central door locking is operated by pushingthe driver's door lock switch toward the front orrear of the vehicle. If the passenger door is openwhen the switch is pushed, the door will remainlocked when closed.

NOTE:o When pushing the switch toward the

rear, all doors will unlock.When pushing the switch toward thefront, all doors will lock.

o When the door is unlocked, the red markon the switch is visible.

o The central door locking is operated byturning the key (driver's door only) to-ward the front or rear of the vehicle.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

B070A01A-AAT

(If Installed)

This system is designed to provide protectionfrom unauthorized entry into the car. This sys-tem is operated in three stages: the first is the"Armed" stage, the second is the "Alarm" stage,and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-gered, the system provides an audible alarmwith blinking of the turn signal light.

o If the door is locked/unlocked multipletimes in rapid succession with either thevehicle key or door lock switch, the sys-tem may stop operating temporarily inorder to protect the circuit and preventdamage to system components.


7

!

NOTE:1) If any door, tail gate or engine hood

remains open, the system will not bearmed.

2) If this happens, rearm the system asdescribed above.

3) Once the system is armed, only the tailgate may be unlocked using the keywithout disarming the system.

CAUTION:Do not arm the system until all passengershave left the car. If the system is armed whilea passenger(s) remains in the car, the alarmmay be activated when the remainingpassenger(s) leaves the car.

B070C02GK-AAT

Alarm Stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the followingoccur while the car is parked and the system isarmed.

1) A front door is unlocked and opened withoutusing the transmitter.

2) The tail gate is opened without using the key.3) The engine hood is opened.

The siren will sound and the turn signal lamp willblink continuously for 27 seconds. (This hap-pens 3 times). To turn off the system, unlock thedoor with the transmitter.

CAUTION:Avoid trying to start the engine while thesystem is armed.

!

B070D05GK-AAT

Disarmed Stage

The system will be disarmed when either of thefollowing steps are taken:

1) The driver's or passenger's door is un-locked by depressing the "UNLOCK" buttonon the transmitter.

2) In the middle of alarming or after alarming, itkeeps for 30 seconds when the key is turnedto the "ON" position.

After completing one of the steps above, the turnsignal light will blink twice to indicate that thesystem is disarmed.

NOTE:If any door, tail gate or engine hood is notopened within 30 seconds, the system willbe rearmed.

OGK016102LOCK

UNLOCK


8

B070F03A-AAT

Keyless Entry System (If installed)

NOTE:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion.

CAUTION:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Locking doors

1. Close all doors.2. Push the "LOCK" button on the transmitter.3. At the same time all doors lock, the turn signal

lights will blink once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.2. At the same time all doors unlock, the turn

signal lights will blink twice to indicate that thesystem is disarmed.

NOTE:The transmitter will not work if any of fol-lowing occur:- The ignition key is in ignition switch.- You exceed the operating distance limit

(10 m).- The battery in the transmitter is weak.- Other vehicles or objects may be block-

ing the signal.- The weather is extremely cold.- The transmitter is close to a radio trans-

mitter such as a radio station or anairport which can interfere with normaloperation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not work cor-rectly, open and close the door with theignition key. If you have a problem with thetransmitter, contact an authorized HyundaiDealer.

NOTE:Keep the transmitter away from water orany liquid. If the keyless entry system isinoperative due to exposure to water orliquids, it will not be covered by your manu-facturer vehicle warranty.

B075E01O-AAT

Panic Warning

1. Push the "PANIC" button on the transmitter.2. At the same time, the siren will sound and the

turn signal lights will blink for 30 seconds.3. To turn off the system, push the "PANIC"

button again on the transmitter.

OGK016102

PANIC

!


9

B070E02GK-GAT

Replacing the battery

When the transmitter's battery begins to getweak, it may take several pushes on the buttonto lock or unlock the doors, and the LED will notlight. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Battery type : CR2016

Replacement instructions:

1. Carefully separate the case with a bladescrewdriver as shown in the illustration.

OGK016122

Screwdriver

2. Remove the old battery from the case andnote the polarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same(+side facing up),then insert it in the transmitter.

NOTE:Install a new battery within 30 seconds afterremoving the old one. If installing a newbattery takes more than 30 seconds, takethe following steps.

1) Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" posi-tion.

2) Make sure that the turn signal lampsblink once by pushing the "LOCK" or"UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.

OGK016121

Battery

POWER WINDOW

B050A02GK-AAT

The power windows operate only when theignition key is in the "ON" position. The mainswitches are located on the driver's arm restand control the front windows on the respectivesides of the vehicle. The windows may beopened by depressing the front portion of theswitch. To stop at the desired opening, releasethe switch. The window may be closed by pullingthe front portion of the switch. To open thewindow on the driver's side, press the switch(1)halfway down. The window moves as long asthe switch is operated. To fully open the driver'swindow automatically, press the switch fullydown. In automatic operation, the window willfully open even if you let go of the switch.

HGK2015

(2)

(1)


10

!

HGK2016

WARNING:o Passengers can be injured if their head,

hands or other body parts are trapped bya closing window. Always check forobstructions before raising any window.

o NEVER leave the ignition key in the ve-hicle.

o NEVER leave any child unattended in thevehicle. Even very young children mayinadvertently cause the vehicle to move,entangle themselves in the windows, orotherwise injure themselves or others.

o Do not attempt to operate the main switchon the driver's door and a switch onanother door in opposing directions atthe same time. If this is done, the windowwill stop and cannot be opened or closed.

SEATS

B080A02A-AAT

Adjustable Front Seats

! WARNING:o Never adjust the driver’s seat while the

vehicle is moving. Any sudden or unex-pected movement of the seat could causeyou to lose control of the vehicle result-ing in an accident. Only adjust thedriver’s seat when the vehicle is station-ary.

o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close tothe airbag. Position the seat so that youcan sit as far back as possible from theairbag and still comfortably reach allcontrols.

To stop at the desired opening, pull up andrelease the switch. In order to prevent operationof the passenger front window by the passen-ger, a window lock switch (2) is provided on thearm rest of the driver's door. To disable thepassenger's power window, push the windowlock switch. To revert to normal operation, pushin on the window lock switch again.

NOTE:The power windows can be operated for 30seconds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ACC" or "LOCK" positions, or removedfrom the ignition switch. If the front doorsare opened during this 30 second period,the power windows can no longer be oper-ated without the ignition key turned to the"ON" position.


11

!B080B04A-AAT

Front SeatAdjusting Seat Forward and Rearward

To move the seat toward the front or rear, pullthe lock release lever upward. This will releasethe seat on its track so you can move it forwardor rearward to the desired position. When youfind the position you want, release the lever andslide the seat forward or rearward on its trackuntil it locks into the desired position and cannotbe moved further.

OGK036002

WARNING:After adjusting the seat, always check thatit is securely locked into place by attempt-ing to move the seat forward or rearwardwithout using the lock release lever. Sud-den or unexpected movement of the driver'sseat could cause you to lose control of thevehicle resulting in an accident.

B080C02A-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

To recline the seatback, lean forward to takeyour weight off it, then pull up on the reclinercontrol lever at the outside edge of the seat. Nowlean back until the desired seatback angle isachieved. To lock the seatback into position,release the recliner control lever.

OGK036003


12

!

B080D01JM

o For maximum effectiveness in case of anaccident the headrest should be ad-justed so the middle of the headrest is atthe same height as the top of theoccupant's eyes. For this reason, theuse of a cushion that holds the bodyaway from the seatback is not recom-mended.

o Do not operate vehicle with the head-rests removed as injury to the occupantsmay occur in the event of an accident.Headrests may provide protection againstneck injuries when properly adjusted.

o Do not adjust the headrest hejght whilethe vehicle is in motion.

WARNING:! WARNING:Riding with a reclined seatback increasesyour chance of serious or fatal injuries inthe event of a collision or sudden stop. Theprotection of your restraint system (seatbelts and airbags) is greatly reduced byreclining your seat. Seat belts must be snugagainst your hips and chest to work prop-erly. The more the seatback is reclined, thegreater the chance that an occupant's hipswill slide under the lap belt or the occupant'sneck will strike the shoulder belt. Driversand passengers should always sit well backin their seats, properly belted, and with theseatbacks upright.

B080D02JM-AAT

Adjustable Headrests

Headrests are designed to help reduce the riskof neck injuries.To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower theheadrest, push it down while pressing the lockknob. To remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the lock knob while pullingupward. This should only be done when the seatis not occupied.

Lock Knob

HGK2032


13

B080F01F-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment(Driver's Seat Only) (If Installed)

To raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion, turn the knob forward or rearward.

OGK036004

B080E01F-AAT

Lumbar Support Control(Driver's seat only) (If Installed)

The driver's seat is equipped with adjustablelumbar support.To increase the amount of lumbar support, pullthe lever forward.To decrease it, push the lever toward the rear.

SOFT

OGK036005

FIRM

B130A02GK-AAT

Rear Seat Entry (Walk in device)

The driver and front passenger's seatbacksshould be tilted to enter the rear seat.

By pulling up the walk in device lever (1) at theleft-upper side of the driver side seatback, theseatback will tilt forward. Then pull the lockrelease lever (2) up to move the seat forward.

OGK036007


14

B099A02GK-AAT

Before Folding the Rear Seats

In order to prevent the shoulder belt from beingdamaged while folding the rear seat, the shoul-der belt must be passed through the hanger tokeep it out of the way.

HGK2034

!

By pulling up the walk in device lever (1) at theright-upper side of the passenger side seatback,the seatback will tilt forward. Then push the seatforward to allow the occupants to enter.

Recliner MemoryBy pulling up the walk in device lever (1) theseatback is reclined and returned to the originalposition.

WARNING:Don't drive with the passenger side seatbackreclined. It is dangerous to move it whiledriving. Be sure the seatback is securedfirmly before driving.

OGK036008

!

B129A01F-AAT

Rear SeatRear Seat Positions

WARNING:This vehicle contains two rear seating po-sitions only and a seat belt for each seatingposition. Thus, never permit more than twooccupants to ride in the rear seat becausean unrestrained occupant could be seri-ously injured or killed in the event of avehicle crash.

B129A01GK


15

CAUTION:o Seat belts must be removed from the

hanger when in use.

!

o Before folding the seatback, insert thebuckle in the pocket. This can preventthe buckle from being damaged by theseatback.

OGK016606

! WARNING:The purpose of the fold-down rearseatbacks is to allow you to carry longerobjects than could otherwise be accommo-dated. Never allow passengers to sit on topof the folded down seat back while the caris moving as this is not a proper seatingposition and no seat belts are available foruse. This could result in injury in case of anaccident or sudden stop. Objects carriedon the folded down seatback should notextend higher than the top of the frontseats. This could allow cargo to slide for-ward and cause injury or damage duringsudden stops.

B110A02S-AAT

Folding Rear Seatbacks

The rear seatbacks may be folded to facilitatecarrying long items or to increase the luggagecapacity of the vehicle.

o To unlock the seatback, push the seatbacklocking button, then pull forward on theseatback panel.

o When you return the seatback to its uprightposition, always be sure it has locked intoposition by pulling and pushing on the top ofthe seatback.

HGK2035


16

!

B150B04Y-AAT

Infant or Small Child

All 50 states have child restraint laws. Youshould be aware of the specific requirements inyour state. Child and/or infant safety seats mustbe properly placed and installed in the rear seat.Information about the use of these restraintsbegins on page 1-22.

WARNING:Every person in your vehicle needs to beproperly restrained at all times, includinginfants and children. Never hold a child inyour arms or lap when riding in a vehicle.The violent forces created during a crashwill tear the child from your arms and throwthe child against the interior. Always use achild restraint appropriate for your child'sheight and weight, see page 1-21.

!

SEAT BELT

B150A02S-AAT

Seat Belt Precautions

WARNING:All occupants of the vehicle must wear theirseat belts at all times. Seat belts and childrestraints reduce the risk of serious or fatalinjuries for all occupants in the event of acollision or sudden stop. Without a seatbelt, occupants could be shifted too closeto a deploying airbag, strike the interiorstructure or be thrown from the vehicle.Properly worn seat belts greatly reducethese hazards. Even with advanced airbags,unbelted occupants can be severely in-jured by a deploying airbag. Always followthe precautions about seat belts, airbagsand occupant safety contained in thismanual.

!B140A01S-AAT

REAR SEAT WARNING

For the safety of all passengers, luggage orother cargo should not be piled higher than thetop of the seatback. In addition, do not placeobjects on the rear shelf as they may moveforward during braking or in an accident andstrike vehicle passengers.

OGK016140


17

B150C02A-AAT

Larger Children

Children who are too large for child restraintsystems should always occupy the rear seatand use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lapportion should be fastened snug on the hips andas low as possible. Check belt fit periodically. Achild's squirming could put the belt out of posi-tion. Children are afforded the most safety in theevent of an accident when they are restrainedby a proper restraint system in the rear seat. Ifa larger child (over age 13) must be seated inthe front seat, the child should be securelyrestrained by the available lap/shoulder belt andthe seat should be placed in the rearmostposition. Children under the age of 13 should berestrained securely in the rear seat. Neverplace a child under the age of 13 in the front seat.NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the frontseat of a vehicle.

NOTE:Small children are best protected from in-jury in an accident when properly restrainedin the rear seat by a child restraint systemthat meets the requirements of the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards. Beforebuying any child restraint system, makesure that it has a label certifying that itmeets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dard 213. The restraint must be appropriatefor your child's height and weight. Checkthe label on the child restraint for thisinformation. See page 1-22.

B150D01A-AAT

Pregnant Women

The use of a seat belt is recommended forpregnant women to lessen the chance of injuryin an accident. When a seat belt is used, the lapbelt portion should be placed as low and snuglyas possible on the hips, not across the abdo-men. For specific recommendations, consult aphysician.

B150E01A-AAT

Injured Person

A seat belt should be used when an injuredperson is being transported. When this is nec-essary, you should consult a physician forrecommendations.

B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per Belt

Two people (including children) should neverattempt to use a single seat belt. This couldincrease the severity of injuries in case of anaccident.


18

B160C01A-AAT

Keep Belts Clean and Dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If beltsbecome dirty, they can be cleaned by using amild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye,strong detergents or abrasives should not beused because they may damage and weakenthe fabric.

B160D01A-AAT

When to Replace Seat Belts

Entire in-use seat belt assembly or assembliesshould be replaced if the vehicle has beeninvolved in an accident. This should be doneeven if no damage is visible. Additional ques-tions concerning seat belt operation should bedirected to your Hyundai Dealer.

!

B150G02A-AAT

Do Not Lie Down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the event ofan accident and to achieve maximum effective-ness of the restraint system, all passengersshould be sitting up and the front seats shouldbe in an upright position when the car is moving.A seat belt cannot provide proper protection ifthe person is lying down in the rear seat or if thefront seat is in a reclined position.

WARNING:Riding with a reclined seatback increasesyour chance of serious or fatal injuries inthe event of a collision or sudden stop. Theprotection of your restraint system (seatbelts and airbags) is greatly reduced byreclining your seat. Seat belts must be snugagainst your hips and chest to work prop-erly. The more the seatback is reclined, thegreater the chance that an occupant's hipswill slide under the lap belt causing seriousinternal injuries or the occupant's neckcould strike the shoulder belt. Drivers andpassengers should always sit well back intheir seats, properly belted (see page 1-19),and with the seatbacks upright.

!

B160A02A-AAT

Care of Seat Belts

Seat belt systems should never be disassembledor modified. In addition, care should be taken toassure that seat belts and belt hardware are notdamaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after the rear seatback wasfolded down, be careful not to damage theseat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure thatthe webbing or buckle does not get caughtor pinched in the rear seat. A seat belt withdamaged webbing or buckle will not be asstrong and could possibly fail during acollision or sudden stop, resulting in seri-ous injury.

B160B01A-AAT

Periodic Inspection

It is recommended that all seat belts be in-spected periodically for wear or damage of anykind. Parts of the system that are damagedshould be replaced as soon as possible.


19

!

Release the button to lock the anchor intoposition. Try sliding the height adjuster to makesure that it has locked into the position.

WARNING:o Verify the shoulder belt anchor is locked

into position at the appropriate height.Never position the shoulder belt acrossyour neck or face. Improperly posi-tioned seat belts can cause serious inju-ries in an accident.

o Failure to replace seat belts after anaccident could leave you with damagedseat belts that will not provide protec-tion in the event of another collisionleading to personal injury or death.Replace your seat belts after being in anaccident as soon as possible.

B170A04A-AAT

Height Adjustable Front Seat ShoulderBelt

You can adjust the height of the shoulder beltanchor to one of the 4 positions for maximumcomfort and safety.If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too nearyour neck, you will not be getting the mosteffective protection. The shoulder portion shouldbe adjusted so that it lies across your chest andmidway over your shoulder nearest the doorand not your neck.To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor,lower or raise the height adjuster into an appro-priate position. To raise the height adjuster, pullit up. To lower it, push it down while pressing theheight adjuster button.

HGK2038

B180A01L-AAT

SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point System withEmergency Locking Retractor:To Fasten Your Belt

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractorand insert the metal tab into the buckle. Therewill be an audible "click" when the tab locks intothe buckle.The seat belt automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portion is adjustedmanually so that it fits snugly around your hips.If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, thebelt will extend and let you move around. If thereis a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt willlock into position. It will also lock if you try to leanforward too quickly. Check to make sure thatthe belt is properly locked and that the belt is nottwisted.

B180A01NF


20

B190A02Y-AAT

SEAT BELTS -Front Passenger and RearSeat 3-Point System with CombinationLocking RetractorTo Fasten Your Belt

Combination retractor type seat belts are in-stalled in the rear seat positions to help accom-modate the installation of child restraint sys-tems. Hyundai strongly recommends that chil-dren always be seated in the rear seat. NEVERplace any infant restraint system in the frontseat of the vehicle.This type of seat belt combines the features ofboth an emergency locking retractor seat beltand an automatic locking retractor seat belt. Tofasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractorand insert the metal tab into the buckle. Therewill be an audible "click" when the tab locks intothe buckle.When not securing a child restraint, the seat beltoperates in the same way as the driver's seatbelt (Emergency Locking Retractor Type). Itautomatically adjusts to the proper length onlyafter the lap belt portion of the seat belt isadjusted manually so that it fits snugly aroundyour hips. When the seat belt is fully extendedfrom the retractor to allow the installation of achild restraint system, the seat belt operationchanges to allow the belt to retract, but not toextend. (Automatic Locking Retractor Type)see page 1-27.

NOTE:Seat belt reminder light comes and stays onuntil the seat belt is fastened when theignition key is turned "ON" or "START".And, the warning chime will also sound forabout 6 seconds.

NOTE:Although the combination retractor pro-vides the same level of protection for seatedpassengers in either emergency or auto-matic locking modes, it is recommendedthat seated passengers use the emergencylocking feature for improved convenience.The automatic locking function is intendedto facilitate child restraint installation. Toconvert from the automatic locking featureto the emergency locking operation mode,allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully re-tract.


21

B210A01A-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

The seat belt is released by pressing the re-lease button in the locking buckle. When it isreleased, the belt should automatically drawback into the retractor.If this does not happen, check the belt to be sureit is not twisted, then try again.

B210A01NF

! WARNING:o For maximum restraint system protec-

tion, seat belts must always be usedwhenever the car is moving.

o Seat belts are most effective whenseatbacks are in the upright position.

o Children age 12 and younger must al-ways be properly restrained in the rearseat. Never allow children to ride in thefront passenger seat. If a child over 13must be seated in the front seat, he/shemust be properly belted and the seatshould be moved as far back as possible.

o Never wear the shoulder belt under yourarm or behind your back. An improperlypositioned shoulder belt can cause se-rious injuries in a crash. The shoulderbelt should be positioned midway overyour shoulder across your collarbone.

o Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. Atwisted belt can't do its job as well. In acollision, it could even cut into you. Besure the belt webbing is straight and nottwisted.

o Be careful not to damage the belt web-bing or hardware. If the belt webbing orhardware is damaged, replace it.

!

B200A01A-AAT

Adjusting Your Seat Belt

WARNING:You should place the lap belt portion as lowas possible and snugly across your hips,not on your waist. If the lap belt is locatedtoo high on your waist, it may increase thechance of injury in the event of a collision.Both arms should not be under or over thebelt. Rather, one should be over and theother under, as shown in the illustration.Never wear the seat belt under the armnearest the door.

B200A01NF


22

! WARNING:o A child restraint system must be placed

in the rear seat. Never install a child orinfant seat on the front passenger's seat.Should an accident occur and cause thepassenger side airbag to deploy, it couldseverely injure or kill an infant or childseated in an infant or child seat. Thusonly use a child restraint in the rear seatof your vehicle.

o A safety belt or child restraint systemcan become very hot if it is left in a closedvehicle on a sunny day, even if the out-side temperature does not feel hot. Besure to check the seat cover and bucklesbefore placing a child there.

o When the child restraint system is not inuse, store it in the trunk or fasten it witha safety belt so that it will not be thrownforward in the case of a sudden stop oran accident.

o Children may be seriously injured orkilled by an inflating airbag. All children,even those too large for child restraints,must ride in the rear seat.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

B230A03A-AAT

Children riding in the car should sit in the rearseat and must always be properly restrained tominimize the risk of injury in an accident, suddenstop or sudden maneuver. According to acci-dent statistics provided by the National High-way Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),children are safer when properly restrained inthe rear seats than in the front seat. Largerchildren not in a child restraint should use oneof the seat belts provided.All 50 states have child restraint laws. Youshould be aware of the specific requirements inyour state. Child and/or infant safety seats mustbe properly placed and installed in the rear seat.You must use a commercially available childrestraint system that meets the requirements ofthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards(FMVSS).Children could be injured or killed in a crash iftheir restraints are not properly secured. Forsmall children and babies, a child seat or infantseat must be used. Before buying a particularchild restraint system, make sure it fits your carand seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all theinstructions provided by the manufacturer wheninstalling the child restraint system.

!To reduce the chance of serious or fatalinjuries:o Children of all ages are safer when re-

strained in the rear seat. A child riding inthe front passenger seat can be force-fully struck by an inflating airbag result-ing in serious or fatal injuries.

o Always follow the instructions for in-stallation and use of the child restraintmaker.

o Always make sure the child seat is se-cured properly in the car and your childis securely restrained in the child seat.

o Never hold a child in your arms or lapwhen riding in a vehicle. The violentforces created during a crash will tear thechild from your arms and throw the childagainst the car’s interior.

o Never put a seat belt over yourself and achild. During a crash, the belt couldpress deep into the child causing seri-ous internal injuries.

o Never leave children unattended in avehicle – not even for a short time. Thecar can heat up very quickly, resulting inserious injuries to children inside. Evenvery young children may inadvertentlycause the vehicle to move, entangle them-selves in the windows, or lock them-selves or others inside the vehicle.

WARNING:


23

!o Never allow two children, or any two

persons, to use the same seat belt.o Children often squirm and reposition

themselves improperly. Never let a childride with the shoulder belt under theirarm or behind their back. Always prop-erly position and secure children in therear seat.

o Never allow a child to stand-up or kneelon the seat or floorboard of a movingvehicle. During a collision or suddenstop, the child can be violently thrownagainst the vehicles interior, resulting inserious injury.

o Never use an infant carrier or a childsafety seat that "hooks" over a seatback,it may not provide adequate security inan accident.

o Seat belts can become very hot, espe-cially when the car is parked in directsunlight. Always check seat belt buck-les before fastening them over a child.

o Always store or secure a child seat, evenwhen it is not in use. During a collisionor sudden stop, the child seat could bethrown inside the vehicle.

WARNING:

B230B02GK-GAT

Using a Child Restraint System

For small children and babies, the use of a childseat or infant seat is required. This child seat orinfant seat should be of appropriate size for thechild and should be installed in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions. It is furtherrequired that the seat be placed in the vehicle'srear seat since this can make an importantcontribution to safety. Your vehicle is providedwith two child restraint hook holders for installing the child seat or infant seat.

B230C06F-AAT

Installing a Child Restraint Seat with the"Tether Anchorage" System

Two child restraint hook holders are located onthe luggage compartment floor.

To install the child restraint seat

OGK016230

Tether Anchor Cover Child RestraintHook Holder

1. Open the tether anchor cover on the rearluggage compartment floor.

2. Route the child restraint seat strap over theseatback.For vehicles with adjustable headrests, routethe tether strap under the headrest andbetween the headrest posts, otherwise routethe tether strap over the top of the seatback.


24

!WARNING:

o A child can be seriously injured or killedin a collision if the child restraint is notproperly anchored. Always follow thechild seat manufacturer’s instructionsfor installation and use.

o Never mount more than one child re-straint to a single tether or to a singlelower anchorage point. The increasedload caused by multiple seats may causethe tethers or anchorage points to break,causing serious injury or death.

B230E01GK

Covering shelf

Front of Vehicle

Tether strap hook

Blanking covers

Rear luggage compartment floor

3. Remove the blanking covers on the cover-ing shelf.

4. Connect the tether strap hook to the childrestraint hook holder through the hole on thecovering shelf and tighten to secure the seat.

Child RestraintHook Holders

To install the child restraint seat:For mania pack

1. Remove the front board on the luggagecopartment floor.

2. Route the child restraint seat strap over theseatback.For vehicles with adjustable headrests, routethe tether strap under the headrest andbetween the headrest posts, otherwise routethe tether strap over the top of the seatback.

3. Remove the blanking covers on the cover-ing shelf.

4. Connect the tether strap hook to the childrestraint hook holder through the hole on thecovering shelf and tighten to secure the seat.

OGK016900L


25

! WARNING:o There is no center rear seat position.o A child can be seriously injured or killed

in a collision if the child restraint is notproperly anchored. Always follow thechild seat manufacturer’s instructionsfor installation and use.

o Never install a child restraint using theISOFIX anchors at the center position ofthe rear seat. In a crash, the ISOFIXanchors may break if a car seat is improp-erly placed in the center position result-ing in serious or fatal injuries. Only placea ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child seatin the left or right out-board rear seatingpositions (as shown) to the appropriateISOFIX anchors provided.

o Never mount more than one child re-straint to a single tether or to a singlelower anchorage point. The increasedload caused by multiple seats may causethe tethers or anchorage points to break,causing serious injury or death.

o When using the vehicle’s “ISOFIX” sys-tem to install a child restraint system inthe rear seat, all unused vehicle rear seatbelt metal latch plates or tabs must belatched securely in their seat belt buck-les and the seat belt webbing must beretracted behind the child restraint toprevent the child from reaching and tak-ing hold of unretracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs mayallow the child to reach the unretractedseat belts which may result in strangu-lation and a serious injury or death to thechild in the child restraint.

B230D05GK-AAT

Securing the child restraint seat with the"ISOFIX" system

Some child seat manufacturers make childrestraint seats that are labeled as ISOFIX orISOFIX-compatible child restraint seats. Theseseats include two rigid or webbing mountedattachments that connect to two ISOFIX an-chors at specific seating positions in your ve-hicle. This type of child restraint seat eliminatesthe need to use seat belts to attach the childseat.ISOFIX anchors have been provided in yourvehicle. The ISOFIX anchors are located in theleft and right outboard rear seating positions.Their locations are shown in the illustration.

B230F01GK


26

!HGK261

Follow the child seat manufacturer's instruc-tions to properly install child restraint seats withISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the ISOFIX child re-straint, assure that the seat is properly attachedto the ISOFIX and tether anchors. Also, test thechild restraint seat before you place the child init. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also try to tugthe seat forward. Check to see if the anchorshold the seat in place.

WARNING:A child can be seriously injured or killed ina collision if the child restraint is not prop-erly anchored to the car and the child is notproperly restrained in the child restraint.Always follow the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions for installation and use.

The ISOFIX anchors are located between theseatback and the seat cushion of the rear seatleft and right outboard seating positions.

B230D02GK

ISOFIX Anchor ISOFIX AnchorPosition Indicator

! CAUTION:Do not allow the rear seat belt webbing toget scratched or pinched by the ISOFIX-seat latch and ISOFIX anchor during theinstallation.


27

! WARNING:o If the retractor is not in the Automatic

Locking mode, the child restraint canmove when your vehicle turns or stopssuddenly. A child can be seriously in-jured or killed if the child restraint is notproperly anchored to the car, includingsetting the retractor to the AutomaticLocking mode.

o Do not install any child restraint systemin the front passenger seat. Should anaccident occur and cause the passengerside airbag to deploy, it could severelyinjure or kill an infant or child seated inan infant or child seat. Therefore, onlyuse a child restraint system in the rearseat of your vehicle.

If the retractor is in the automatic locking mode,the belt will be locked. After installation of thechild restraint system, try to move it in alldirections to be sure the child restraint systemis securely installed. If you need to tighten thebelt, pull more webbing toward the retractor.When you unbuckle the seat belt and allow it toretract, the retractor will automatically revertback to its normal seated passenger emer-gency locking usage condition.

NOTE:o Before installing the child restraint sys-

tem in any seating position, read theinstructions supplied by the child re-straint system manufacturer.

o If the seat belt does not operate as de-scribed, have the system checked imme-diately by your authorized Hyundaidealer.

B230G02O-AAT

Child Restraint System Installation onoutboard Rear Seats

To install a child restraint system in the outboardrear seats, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirelyfrom its retractor until a "click" is felt. This willengage the seat belt retractor automatic lockingfeature, which allows the seat belt to retract butnot extend. Install the child restraint system,buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt totake up any slack. Make sure that the lap portionof the belt is tight around the child restraintsystem and the shoulder portion of the belt ispositioned so that it can not interfere with thechild's head or neck. Also, double check to besure that the retractor has engaged the auto-matic locking feature by trying to extend web-bing out of the retractor.

On outboard rear seats

HGK1010


28

The seat belt pre-tensioner system consistsmainly of the following components.

Their locations are shown in the illustration.

1. SRS airbag warning light2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly3. SRS control module

Driver's airbag

B180B01GK2

3

Passenger'sairbag

1 ! WARNING:To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt:

o The seatbelt must be worn correctly andadjusted to the proper position (seepages beginning on 1-18). Please readand follow all of the important informa-tion and precautions about your vehicle’soccupant safety features – includingseat belts – that are provided in thismanual.

o Be sure you and your passengers alwayswear seat belts and wear them properly.

B180B05GK-AAT

Pre-tensioner Seat Belt (If Installed)

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with driver'sand front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts.The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to makesure that the seat belts fit tightly against theoccupant's body in certain frontal collisions.The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activatedalone or, where the frontal collision is severeenough, together with the airbags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if theoccupant tries to lean forward too quickly, theseat belt retractor will lock into position. Incertain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner willactivate and pull the seat belt into tighter contactagainst the occupant's body.

OMG035300


29

! WARNING:o Pre-tensioners are designed to operate

only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced.All seat belts, of any type, should alwaysbe replaced after they have been wornduring a collision.

o The pre-tensioner seat belt assemblymechanisms become hot during activa-tion. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seatbelt assemblies for several minutes afterthey have been activated.

o Do not attempt to inspect or replace thepre-tensioner seat belts yourself. Thismust be done by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat beltassemblies.

o Do not attempt to service or repair thepre-tensioner seat belt system in anymanner.

o Improper handling of the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies, and failure to heedthe warnings to not strike, modify, in-spect, replace, service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may leadto improper operation or inadvertentactivation and serious injury.

o Always wear seat belts when driving orriding in a motor vehicle.

CAUTION:o The sensor that activates the SRS airbag

is connected with the pre-tensioner seatbelts. The SRS airbag warning light onthe instrument panel will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds after the igni-tion key has been turned to the "ON"position, and then it should turn off.

o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not work-ing properly, this warning light will illu-minate even if there is no malfunction ofthe SRS airbag system. If the SRS airbagwarning light does not illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to "ON" or if itremains illuminated after approximately6 seconds, or if it illuminates while thevehicle is being driven, please have anauthorized Hyundai dealer inspect thepre-tensioner seat belts and SRS airbagsystem as soon as possible.

!

AIRBAG

NOTE:o Both the driver's and front passenger's

pre-tensioner seat belts will be activatedin certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activatedalone or, where the frontal collision issevere enough, together with theairbags.

o When the pre-tensioner seat belts areactivated, a loud noise may be heard andfine dust, which may appear to be smoke,may be visible in the passenger com-partment. These are normal operatingconditions and are not hazardous.

o Although it is harmless, the fine dustmay cause skin irritation and should notbe breathed for prolonged periods. Washall exposed skin areas thoroughly afteran accident in which the pre-tensionerseat belts were activated.


30

B240D01GK-GAT

(If Installed)

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM

1. Driver's front airbag2. Passenger's front airbag3. Front side impact airbag

OGK036022


31

OGK016240

The purpose of the SRS is to provide thevehicle's driver and/or the front passenger withadditional protection than that offered by theseat belt system alone in case of a frontal impactof sufficient severity. The SRS uses sensors togather information about the driver's seat posi-tion, the driver's and front passenger's seat beltusage and impact severity.

The driver's seat track position sensors, whichare installed on the seat track, determine if theseats are fore or aft of a reference position. Theseat belt buckle sensors determine if the driverand front passenger's seat belts are fastened.These sensors provide the ability to control theSRS deployment based on how close the driver'sseat is to the steering wheel, whether or not theseat belts are fastened, and how severe theimpact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability to controlthe airbag inflation with two levels. A first stagelevel is provided for moderate-severity impacts.A second stage level is provided for moresevere impacts.

According to the impact severity, seating posi-tion and seat belt usage, the SRSCM(SRSControl Module) controls the airbag inflation.Failure to properly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Additionally, your Hyundai is equipped with anoccupant classification system in the frontpassenger's seat. The occupant classificationsystem detects the presence of a passenger inthe front passenger's seat and will turn off thefront passenger's airbag under certain condi-tions. For more detail, see "Occupant Classifi-cation System" later in this section.

B240A03GK-AAT

Driver's and Passenger's Front Airbag

Your Hyundai is equipped with an advancedSupplemental Restraint (Airbag) System. Theindications of the system's presence are theletters "SRS AIRBAG" embossed on the airbagpad cover in the steering wheel and thepassenger's side front panel pad above theglove box.

The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags installedunder the pad covers in the center of thesteering wheel and the passenger's side frontpanel above the glove box.

Driver's Front Airbag


32

CAUTION:If a seat track position sensor or an occu-pant classification system is not workingproperly, the SRS airbag warning light onthe instrument panel will illuminate be-cause the SRS airbag warning light is con-nected with the seat track position sensorand the occupant classification system. Ifthe SRS airbag warning light does not illu-minate when the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position, remains illuminated af-ter approximately 6 seconds when the igni-tion key is turned to the "ON" position, orif it illuminates while the vehicle is beingdriven, have an authorized Hyundai dealerinspect the advanced SRS airbag system assoon as possible.

!AIR

BAG

! WARNING:o Modification to the seat structure can

adversely affect the seat track positionsensor and cause the airbag to deploy ata different level than should be pro-vided.

o Do not place any objects underneath thefront seats as they could damage theseat track position sensor or interferewith the occupant classification sys-tem.

o Do not place any objects that may causemagnetic fields near the front seat. Thesemay cause a malfunction of the seattrack position sensor.

NOTE:o Be sure to read information about the

SRS on the labels provided on the topsideof the sun visor.

o Advanced airbags are combined withpre-tensioner seat belts to help provideenhanced occupant protection in fron-tal crashes. Front airbags are not in-tended to deploy in collisions in whichsufficient protection can be provided bythe pre-tensioner seat belt.

o If you are considering modification ofyour vehicle due to a disability, pleasecontact the Hyundai Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-633-5151.


33

! WARNING:o Move your seat as far back as practical

from the front airbags, while still main-taining control of the vehicle.

o Never sit or lean unnecessarily close tothe front or side airbags.

o Never lean against the door or centerconsole – always sit in an upright posi-tion.

o Do not allow an adult passenger to ridein the front seat when the “PassengerAirbag OFF” indicator is illuminated,because the airbag will not deploy in theevent of a moderate or severe frontalcrash.

o Never place objects over or near anyairbag module (front or side impactairbags), because these objects can in-jure passengers in a crash.

o Never place covers, blankets or after-market seat warmers on the passengerseat as these may interfere with theoccupant classification system.

! WARNING:Always use seat belts and child restraints –every trip, every time, everyone! Airbagsinflate with considerable force and in theblink of an eye. Seat belts help keep occu-pants in proper position to obtain maxi-mum benefit from the airbag. Even withadvanced airbags, improperly and unbeltedoccupants can be severely injured whenthe airbag inflates. Always follow the pre-cautions about seat belts, airbags and oc-cupant safety contained in this manual.

To reduce the chance of serious or fatalinjuries and receive the maximum safetybenefit from your restraint system:o Never place a child in any child or booster

seat in the front seat (see child restraints1-31).

o ABC – Always Buckle Children in theback seat. It is the safest place forchildren of any age to ride.

o Front and side impact airbags can injureoccupants improperly positioned in thefront seats.

! WARNING:o Do not tamper or disconnect SRS wiring

or other components. Injuries couldresult from inadvertent deployment orfailure of the airbag to deploy in a crash.

o If the SRS airbag warning light (see page1-49) remains illuminated while the ve-hicle is being driven, have an authorizedHyundai dealer inspect the airbag sys-tem as soon as possible.

o Airbags can only be used once – have anauthorized Hyundai dealer replace theairbag immediately after deployment.

o The SRS is designed to deploy the frontairbags only when an impact is suffi-ciently severe and when the impact angleis within a range as measured from theforward longitudinal axis of the vehicle.The front airbags will not deploy in side,rear or rollover impacts. Additionally,the airbags will only deploy once. Seatbelts must be worn at all times.


34

! WARNING:o No objects should be placed over or near

the airbag modules on the steeringwheel, instrument panel, and the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box,because any such object could causeharm if the vehicle is in a crash severeenough to cause the airbags to deploy.

o If the airbags deploy, they must be re-placed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.Deployed airbags WILL NOT inflate againand will provide no protection in subse-quent collisions.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring or other components of the SRSsystem. Doing so could result in injury,due to accidental deployment of theairbags or by rendering the SRS inopera-tive.

o Even though your vehicle is equippedwith the occupant classification sys-tem, do not install a child restraint sys-tem in the front passenger seat position.A child restraint system must never beplaced in the front seat.The infant or child could be severelyinjured or killed by an airbag deploy-ment in case of an accident.

o Children younger than 13 years mustalways be properly restrained in the rearseat. Never allow children to ride in thefront passenger seat. If a child over 13must be seated in the front seat, he orshe must be properly belted and the seatshould be moved as far back as possible.

o For maximum safety protection in alltypes of crashes, all occupants includ-ing the driver should always wear theirseat belts whether or not an airbag isalso provided at their seating position tominimize the risk of severe injury ordeath in the event of a crash. Do not sitor lean unnecessarily close to the airbagwhile the vehicle is in motion.

o Sitting improperly or out of position canresult in serious or fatal injury in a crash.All occupants should sit upright withthe seat back in an upright position,centered on the seat cushion with theirseat belt on, legs comfortably extendedand their feet on the floor until the ve-hicle is parked and the ignition key isremoved.

! WARNING:! WARNING:

B240A02GK

Rear impact

Side ImpactRollover

o Move your seat as far back as practicalfrom the front airbags, while still main-taining control of the vehicle. You andyour passengers should never sit or leanunnecessarily close to the airbags. Im-properly positioned drivers and passen-gers can be severely injured by inflatingairbags.

o Front airbags are not intended to deployin side-impact, rear-impact or rollovercrashes. In addition, front airbags willnot deploy in frontal crashes below thedeployment threshold.


35

! WARNING:o The SRS airbag system must deploy very

rapidly to provide protection in a crash.If an occupant is out of position becauseof not wearing a seat belt, the airbag mayforcefully contact the occupant causingserious or fatal injuries.

B240B04GK-AAT

SRS Components and Functions

The SRS consists of the following components:

1. "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" Indicator(Front passenger's seat only)

2. SRS "AIRBAG" warning light3. Knee Bolster4. Passenger's Airbag Module5. Driver's Airbag Module6. SRS Control Module (SRSCM)7. Occupant Classification System

(Front passenger's seat only)8. Driver's Seat Track Position Sensors9. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat Belt

Buckle Sensors10. Side Impact Sensor (If Installed)11. Retractor Pre-tensioner Assemblies

OGK0168003N

12. Side Impact Airbag Module (If Installed)13. Front Impact Sensor

The SRSCM continually monitors all elementswhile the ignition is "ON" to determine if a frontalor near-frontal impact is severe enough torequire airbag deployment or pre-tensioner seatbelt deployment.

The SRS "AIRBAG" warning light on the instru-ment panel will illuminate for about 6 secondsafter the ignition key is turned to the "ON"position or after the engine is started, after whichthe "AIRBAG" warning light should go out.

B240B01L


36

Passanger's Airbag

OGK016241

! CAUTION:Do not install or place any accessories(drink holder, cassette holder, sticker, etc)on the front passenger's panel above theglove box in a vehicle with a passenger's airbag. Such objects may become dangerousprojectiles and cause injury if thepassenger's air bag inflates.

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directlyinto the pad covers will separate under pres-sure from the expansion of the airbags. Furtheropening of the covers then allows full inflation ofthe airbags.

The airbag modules are located both in thecenter of the steering wheel and in the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box. Whenthe SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impactto the front of the vehicle, it will automaticallydeploy the front airbags.

B240B02L

A fully inflated airbag, in combination with aproperly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or thepassenger's forward motion, reducing the riskof head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbag immediatelystarts deflating, enabling the driver to maintainforward visibility and the ability to steer oroperate other controls.

B240B03L


37

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid airfreshener inside a vehicle, do not place itnear the instrument cluster nor on the in-strument panel pad surface. If there is anyleakage from the air freshener onto theseareas (instrument cluster, instrument panelpad or air ventilator), it may damage theseparts. If the liquid from the air freshenerdoes leak onto these areas, wash them withwater immediately.

! !

B240B05L

WARNING:o If an airbag deploys, there may be a loud

noise followed by a fine dust released inthe vehicle. These conditions are nor-mal and are not hazardous - the airbagsare packed in this fine powder. The dustgenerated during airbag deploymentmay cause skin or eye irritation as well asaggravate asthma for some persons.Always wash all exposed skin areas thor-oughly with lukewarm water and a mildsoap after an accident in which theairbags were deployed.

o The SRS can function only when theignition key is in the "ON" position. If theSRS "AIRBAG" warning light does notilluminute, or continuously remains onafter illuminating for about 6 secondswhen the ignition key is turned to the"ON" position, or after the engine isstarted, illuminates while driving, theSRS is not working properly. If this oc-curs, have your vehicle immediately in-spected by your Hyundai dealer.

o Before you replace a fuse or disconnecta battery terminal, turn the ignition keyto the "LOCK" position or remove theignition key. Never remove or replace theair bag related fuse(s) when the ignitionkey is in the "ON" position. Failure toheed this warning will cause the SRS"AIRBAG" warning light to illuminate.

Passenger's Airbag

B990A01GK-AAT

Occupant Classification System

OGK036023N

Your vehicle is equipped with an occupantclassification system in the front passenger'sseat.The occupant classification system is designedto detect the presence of a properly-seatedfront passenger and determine if thepassenger's front air bag should be enabled(may inflate) or not. The driver's front air bag isnot affected or controlled by the occupant clas-sification system.


38

If the front passenger seat is occupied by aperson that the system determines to be of adultsize, and he/she sits properly (sitting uprightwith the seatback in an upright position, cen-tered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on,legs comfortably extended and their feet on thefloor), the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-cator will be turned off and the front passenger'sair bag will be able to inflate, if necessary, infrontal crashes.You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator on the center facia panel. This systemdetects the conditions 1~3 in the following tableand activates or deactivates front passengerair bag based on these conditions.

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Conditiondetected by the

occupantclassification

system

"Passenger airbag off"

indicator light

SRS warninglight

Front passen-ger air bag Side air bag

Indicator/Warning light Devices

1. Adult *1

2. Child*2 orchildrestraintsystem*3

3. Unoccupied

Off

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Activated

Deactivated

Deactivated

Activated

Activated

Deactivated

*1)The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the frontpassenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physiqueand posture.

*2)Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has outgrowna child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her asan adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

*3)Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

! WARNING:Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passenger's seat when it isunoccupied by a passenger adversely affects the occupant classification system (OCS).


39

- Never excessively recline the front passen-ger seatback.

1KMN3665

1KMN3662

- Never place feet on the dashboard.- Never sit with hips shifted towards the frontof the seat.

1KMN3663

1KMN3664

- Never place feet on the front passengerseatback.

OVQ036014N

- Never put a heavy load in the front passen-ger seat or seatback pocket.

OVQ036013N

- Never lean on the center console.- Never sit on one side of the front passenger

seat.


40

When an adult is seated in the front passengerseat, if the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-cator is on, turn the ignition key to "LOCK" andask the passenger to sit properly (sitting uprightwith the seat back in an upright position, centeredon the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legscomfortably extended and their feet on the floor).Restart the engine and have the person remainin that position. This will allow the system to detectthe person and to enable the passenger air bag.

Proper position

B990A01O

If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator isstill on, ask the passenger to move to the rearseat.

! WARNING:Do not allow an adult to ride in the front seatwhen the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”indicator is illuminated, because the air bagwill not deploy in the event of a crash. If the"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator re-mains illuminated after the passenger re-positions themselves properly and the caris restarted, we recommend that passengermove to the rear seat because thepassenger's front air bag will not deploy.Front seat passengers must stay properlyseated to avoid serious injury from a de-ploying air bag.

NOTE:The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicatorilluminates for about 4 seconds after theignition key is turned to the "ON" positionor after the engine is started. If the frontpassenger seat is occupied, the occupantclassification sensor will then classify thefront passenger after several more sec-onds.

! WARNING:Do not put a heavy load in the front passen-ger seatback pocket or on the front passen-ger seat. Do not hang onto the front pas-senger seat. Do not hang any items such asa seatback table on the front passengerseatback. Do not place feet on the frontpassenger seatback. Do not place any itemsunder the front passenger seat. Any ofthese could interfere with proper sensoroperation.


41

!! CAUTION:If the occupant classification system is notworking properly, the SRS air bag warninglight on the instrument panel will illumi-nate because the passenger's front air bagis connected with the occupant classifica-tion system. If there is a malfunction of theoccupant classification system, the "PAS-SENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator will illu-minate and the passenger's front air bagwill not inflate in frontal impact crasheseven if there is adult occupant in the frontpassenger's seat. If the SRS air bag warninglight does not illuminate when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, remainsilluminated after approximately 6 secondswhen the ignition key is turned to the "ON"position, or if it illuminates while the vehicleis being driven, have an authorized Hyundaidealer inspect the occupant classificationsystem and the SRS air bag system as soonas possible.

! WARNING:o Even though your vehicle is equipped

with the occupant classification sys-tem, never install a child restraint systemin the front passenger's seat. A deploy-ing air bag can forcefully strike a childresulting in serious injuries or death.Any child under 13 years of age shouldride in the rear seat. Children too largefor child restraints should use the avail-able lap/shoulder belts. No matter whattype of crash, children of all ages aresafer when restrained in the rear seat.

o If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-cator is illuminated when the frontpassenger's seat is occupied by an adultand he/she sits properly (sitting uprightwith the seatback in an upright position,centered on the seat cushion with theirseat belt on, legs comfortably extendedand their feet on the floor), have thatperson sit in the rear seat.

o Do not modify or replace the front pas-senger seat. Don't place anything on orattach anything such as a blanket orafter market seat heater to the frontpassenger seat. This can adversely af-fect the occupant classification system.

o Do not sit on sharp objects such as toolswhen occupying the front passengerseat. This can adversely affect the occu-pant classification system.

o Do not use accessory seat covers on thefront seats.

o Accident statistics show that childrenare safer if they are restrained in the rear,as opposed to the front seat. It is recom-mended that child restraints be securedin a rear seat, including an infant ridingin a rear-facing infant seat, a child ridingin a forward-facing child seat and anolder child riding in a booster seat.

o Air bags can only be used once – have anauthorized Hyundai dealer replace theair bag immediately after deployment.

o A smaller-stature adult who is not seatedcorrectly (for example: seat excessivelyreclined, leaning on the center console,or hips shifted forward in the seat) cancause a condition where the advancedfrontal air bag system senses less seatedpressure than if the occupant wereseated properly (sitting upright with theseatback in an upright position, cen-tered on the seat cushion with their seatbelt on, legs comfortably extended andtheir feet on the floor).

WARNING:


42

! WARNING:

! WARNING:o The side impact airbag is supplemental

to the driver's and the passenger's seatbelt systems and is not a substitute forthem. Therefore your seat belts must beworn at all times while the vehicle is inmotion. The airbags deploy only in cer-tain side impact conditions.

o For best protection from the side impactairbag system and to avoid being injuredby the deploying side impact airbag,both front seat occupants should sit inan upright position with the seat beltproperly fastened. The driver's handsshould be placed on the steering wheelat the 9:00 and 3:00 o'clock positions.The passenger's arms and hands shouldbe placed on their laps.

o Do not use any accessory seat covers.o Use of seat covers could prevent or

reduce the effectiveness of the system.

B990B02MC-AAT

Side Impact Airbag

Your Hyundai is equipped with a side impactairbag in each front seat. The purpose of theairbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/orthe front passenger with additional protectionthan that offered by the seat belt alone. The sideimpact airbags are designed to deploy onlyduring certain side-impact collisions, depend-ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and pointof impact. The side impact airbags are notdesigned to deploy in all side impact situations.

B990B02Y

This condition can result in an adultpotentially being misclassified and illu-mination of the "PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF" indicator.

Important Safety Notes on the Side Im-pact Airbag System

Following is a number of safety points concern-ing this system which should always be ob-served to ensure risk of injury is reduced in anaccident.


43

!o Do not install any accessories on the

side or near the side impact airbag.o Do not place any objects over the airbag

or between the airbag and yourself.o Do not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door and thefront seat. Such objects may becomedangerous projectiles and cause injuryif the supplemental side impact airbaginflates.

o To prevent unexpected deployment ofthe side impact airbag that may result inpersonal injury,avoid impact to the sideairbag sensor when the ignition key ison.

WARNING:

B240C04A-AAT

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance free and thereare no parts you can safely service by yourself.If the SRS "AIRBAG" warning light does notilluminate, or continuously remains on, haveyour vehicle immediately inspected by yourHyundai dealer.Any work on the SRS system, such as remov-ing, installing, repairing, or any work on thesteering wheel must be performed by a qualifiedHyundai technician. Improper handling of theairbag system may result in serious personalinjury.

! WARNING:o Do not install a child restraint system in

the front passenger seat position. Achild restraint system must never beplaced in the front seat. The infant orchild could be severely injured or killedby an airbag deployment in case of anaccident.

o Modification to SRS components or wir-ing, including the addition of any kind ofbadges to the pad covers or modifica-tions to the body structure, can ad-versely affect SRS performance and leadto possible injury.

B240C01HP


44

B240D02JM-AAT

Additional Safety Precautionso Never let passengers ride in the cargo

area (trunk) or on top of a folded-downback seat. All occupants should sit upright,fully back in their seats with their seat beltson and their feet on the floor.

o Passengers should not move out of orchange seats while the vehicle is mov-ing. A passenger who is not wearing a seatbelt during a crash or emergency stop canbe thrown against the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out of the ve-hicle.

o Each seat belt is designed to restrain oneoccupant. If more than one person uses thesame seat belt, they could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision.

o Do not use any accessories on seatbelts. Devices claiming to improve occu-pant comfort or reposition the seat belt canreduce the protection provided by the seatbelt and increase the chance of seriousinjury in a crash.

o Passengers should not place hard orsharp objects between themselves andthe airbags. Carrying hard or sharp objectson your lap or in your mouth can result ininjuries if an airbag inflates.

!o If your car was flooded and has soaked

carpeting or water on the floor, youshouldn't try to start the engine; havethe car towed to an authorized Hyundaidealer.

WARNING:!

o For cleaning the airbag pad covers, useonly a soft, dry cloth or one which hasbeen moistened with plain water. Sol-vents or cleaners could adversely affectthe airbag covers and proper deploy-ment of the system.

o No objects should be placed over or nearthe airbag modules on the steeringwheel, instrument panel, and the frontpassenger’s panel above the glove box,because any such object could causeharm if the vehicle is in a crash severeenough to cause the airbags to inflate.

o If the airbags inflate, they must be re-placed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring, or other components of the SRSsystem. Doing so could result in injury,due to accidental inflation of the airbagsor by rendering the SRS inoperative.

o If components of the airbag system mustbe discarded, or if the vehicle must bescrapped, certain safety precautionsmust be observed. Your Hyundai dealerknows these precautions and can giveyou the necessary information. Failureto follow these precautions and proce-dures could increase the risk of personalinjury.

WARNING:


45

o Keep occupants away from the airbagcovers. All occupants should sit upright, fullyback in their seats with their seat belts on andtheir feet on the floor. If occupants are tooclose to the airbag covers, they could beinjured if the airbags inflate.

o Do not attach or place objects on or nearthe airbag covers. Any object attached toor placed on the front or side impact airbagcovers could interfere with the proper opera-tion of the airbags.

o Do not modify the front seats. Modifica-tion of the front seats could interfere with theoperation of the supplemental restraint sys-tem sensing components or side impactairbags.

o Do not place items under the front seats.Placing items under the front seats couldinterfere with the operation of the supple-mental restraint system sensing compo-nents and wiring harnesses.

o Never hold an infant or child on your lap.The infant or child could be seriously injuredor killed in the event of a crash. All infants andchildren should be properly restrained inappropriate child safety seats or seat beltsin the rear seat.

WARNING:o Sitting improperly or out of position can

cause occupants to be shifted too closeto a deploying airbag, strike the interiorstructure or be thrown from the vehicleresulting in serious injury or death.

o Always sit upright with the seatback inan upright position, centered on theseat cushion with your seat belt on, legscomfortably extended and your feet onthe floor.

Adding Equipment to or Modifying YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle.

If you modify your vehicle by changing yourvehicle's frame, bumper system, front end orside sheet metal or ride height, this may affectthe operation of your vehicle's airbag system.

!


46 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260A03GK-AAT

OGK046028N


47

1. Speedometer 2. Turn Signal Indicator Light 3. Odometer/Trip Odometer 4. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light (If installed) 5. Coolant Temperature Gauge 6. Trip Computer (if installed) 7. Fuel Gauge 8. Tachometer 9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light (If installed)10. Low Tire Pressure Telltale11. TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Malfunction Indicator12. Trip Odometer Reset Knob13. Charging System Warning Light

14. SRS (AIRBAG) Warning Light15. Seat Belt Warning Light16. High Beam Indicator Light17. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light18. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)19. Low Fuel Warning Light20. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light21. Trip Computer Reset Knob (If installed)22. CRUISE Indicator Light (If installed)23. CRUISE SET Indicator Light (If installed)24. Tail Gate Open Warning Light25. Door Ajar Warning Light26. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)


48 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260D01A-AAT

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The blinking green arrows on the instrumentpanel show the direction indicated by the turnsignals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink,blinks more rapidly than normal, or does notilluminate at all, a malfunction in the turn signalsystem is indicated. Your dealer should beconsulted for repairs.

B265C03LZ-AAT

Electronic StabilityControl Indicator Lights(If installed)

The electronic stability control indicators changeoperation according to the ignition switch posi-tion and whether the system is in operation ornot.They will illuminate when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, but should go outafter approximately three seconds. If the ESCor ESC-OFF indicator stays on, take your carto your authorized Hyundai dealer and have thesystem checked. See section 2 for more infor-mation about the ESC.

!! WARNING:

Significantly low tire pressure makes thevehicle unstable and can contribute to lossof vehicle control and increased brakingdistances.Continued driving on low pressure tires willcause the tires to overheat and fail.

B260W02JM-GAT

Low tire pressure telltale

The low tire pressure telltale comes on for 3seconds after the ignition key is turned to the"ON" position.If the warning light does not come on, or continu-ously remains on after coming on for about 3seconds when you turned the ignition key to the"ON" position, the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem is not working properly. If this occurs,have your vehicle checked by an authorizedHyundai dealer as soon as possible.This warning light will also illuminate if one ormore of your tires is significantly under-inflated.You should stop and check your tires as soonas possible. If the warning light illuminates whiledriving, reduce vehicle speed immediately andstop the vehicle. Avoid hard braking and over-correcting at the steering wheel. Inflate the tiresto the proper pressure as indicated on thevehicle’s tire information placard.

B265W02JM-GAT

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor-ing System) malfunction indi-cator

TPMS malfunction indicator comes on for 3seconds after the ignition key is turned to the"ON" position. If the warning light does not comeon, or continuously remains on after coming onfor about 3 seconds when you turned the ignitionkey to the "ON" position, the Tire PressureMonitoring System is not working properly. Ifthis occurs, have your vehicle checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.The warning light also comes on and stays onwhen there is a problem with the Tire PressureMonitoring System.If this happens, the system may not monitor thetire pressure. Have the system checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING:o The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and

sudden tire damage caused by externalfactors.

o If you feel any vehicle instability, imme-diately take your foot off the acceleratorand slowly move to a safe position offthe road.


49

B260J01A-AAT

Charging System Warning Light

The charging system warning light should comeon when the ignition is turned on, then go outwhen the engine is running. If the light stays onwhile the engine is running, there is a malfunc-tion in the electrical charging system. If the lightcomes on while you are driving, stop, turn off theengine and check under the hood. First, makecertain the generator drive belt is in place. If it is,check the tension of the belt. Do this as shownon page 6-19 by pushing down on the center ofthe belt. Have the system checked by yourHyundai dealer as soon as possible.

B260B01JM-AAT

SRS (Airbag) Warning Light

The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) comeson for about 6 seconds after the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position or after the engineis started, after which it will go out.

This light also comes on when the SRS is notworking properly. If the SRI does not come on,or continuously remains on after coming on forabout 6 seconds when you turned the ignitionkey to the "ON" position or started the engine,or if it comes on while driving, have the SRSinspected by an authorized Hyundai Dealer.

B260E02L-AAT

Seat Belt Reminder Light AndChime

Seat belt reminder light comes and stays on untilthe seat belt is fastened when the ignition key isturned to "ON" or "START".And, the warning chime will also sound for about6 seconds.

B260F01A-AAT

High Beam Indicator Light

The high beam indicator light comes on when-ever the headlights are switched to the highbeam or flash position.


50

B260G01A-AAT

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

CAUTION:If the oil pressure warning light stays onwhile the engine is running, serious enginedamage may result. The oil pressure warn-ing light comes on whenever there is insuf-ficient oil pressure. In normal operation, itshould come on when the ignition switchis turned on, then go out when the engineis started. If the oil pressure warning lightstays on while the engine is running, thereis a serious malfunction.If this happens, stop the car as soon as it issafe to do so, turn off the engine and checkthe oil level. If the oil level is low, fill theengine oil to the proper level and start theengine again. If the light stays on with theengine running, turn the engine off imme-diately. In any instance where the oil lightstays on when the engine is running, theengine should be checked by a Hyundaidealer before the car is driven again.

!

B260N02A-AAT

Malfunction IndicatorLight

This light illuminates when there is a malfunctionof an exhaust gas related component, and thesystem is not functioning properly so that theexhaust gas regulation values are not satisfied.This light will also illuminate when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, and then it will goout in a few seconds after the engine is started.If it illuminates while driving, or does not illumi-nate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON"position, take your car to your nearest autho-rized Hyundai dealer and have the systemchecked.

B260M01A-AAT

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

The low fuel level warning light comes on whenthe fuel tank is approaching empty. When itcomes on, you should add fuel as soon aspossible. Driving with the fuel level warning lighton or with the fuel level below "E" can cause theengine to misfire and damage the catalyticconverter.

B260H02GK-AAT

Parking Brake/Low Brake FluidLevel Warning Light

CAUITON:If you suspect brake trouble, have yourbrakes checked by a Hyundai dealer assoon as possible. Driving your car with aproblem in either the brake electrical sys-tem or brake hydraulic system is danger-ous, and could result in a serious injury ordeath.

Warning Light Operation

The parking brake/low brake fluid level warninglight should come on when the parking brake isapplied and the ignition switch is turned to "ON"or "START". After the engine is started, the lightshould go out when the parking brake is re-leased.If the parking brake is not applied, the warninglight should come on when the ignition switch isturned to "ON" or "START", then go out in threeseconds. If the light comes on at any other time,you should slow the vehicle and bring it to acomplete stop in a safe location off the roadway.

!


51

The brake fluid level warning light indicates thatthe brake fluid level in the brake master cylinderis low and hydraulic brake fluid conforming toDOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications should beadded. After adding fluid, if no other trouble isfound, the car should be immediately and care-fully driven to a Hyundai dealer for inspection.If further trouble is experienced, the vehicleshould not be driven at all but taken to a dealerby a professional towing service.Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-diagonalbraking systems. This means you still havebraking on two wheels even if one of the dualsystems should fail. With only one of the dualsystems working, more than normal pedal traveland greater pedal pressure are required to stopthe car. Also, the car will not stop in as short adistance with only half of the brake systemworking. If the brakes fail while you are driving,shift to a lower gear for additional engine brakingand stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.

B260Q01E-GAT

CRUISE Indicator Light(If Installed)

The cruise indicator light in the instrument clus-ter is illuminated when the cruise control mainswitch on the end of the barrel is pushed.The indicator light does not illuminate when thecruise control main switch is pushed a secondtime.Information about the use of cruise control isbeginning on page 1-80.

B260R01E-GAT

CRUISE SET Indicator Light(If installed)

The set indicator light in the instrument clusteris illuminated when the cruise control switch ispushed downward to "SET (COAST)".The set indicator light does not illuminate whenthe control switch is in the "CANCEL" position.

B260K01F-AAT

Tail Gate Open Warning Light

This light remains on unless the tail gate iscompletely closed and latched.

B260L02HP-GAT

Door Ajar Warning Light andChime

The door ajar warning light warns you that a dooris not completely closed and the chime warnsyou that the key is in the ignition switch.

NOTE :The warning chime only sounds wheneverthe key is in the ignition switch and thedriver's side front door is open simulta-neously. The chime sounds until the key isremoved from the ignition switch or thedriver's side front door is closed.


52 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

B280A01TG-AAT

Fuel Gauge

The needle on the gauge indicates the approxi-mate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel capacityis given in Section 9.

NOTE:

The " " symbol means the fuel filler lid

is placed on the left side of the vehicle.

OGK016259

B270A01A-AAT

Brake Pad Wear Warning Sound

The front disc brake pads have wear indicatorsthat should make a high-pitched squealing orscraping noise when new pads are needed. Thesound may come and go or be heard all the timewhen the vehicle is moving. It may also be heardwhen the brake pedal is pushed down firmly.Excessive rotor damage will result if the wornpads are not replaced. See your Hyundai dealerimmediately.

!

B260P02Y-GAT

ABS Service Reminder Indica-tor (SRI)

When the key is turned to the "ON" position, theAnti-Lock Brake System SRI will come on andthen go off in a few seconds. If the ABS SRIremains on, comes on while driving, or does notcome on when the key is turned to the "ON"position, this indicates that there may be aproblem with the ABS.If this occurs, have your vehicle checked byyour Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. Thenormal braking system will still be operational,but without the assistance of the anti-lock brakesystem.

WARNING:If the both ABS SRI and Parking Brake/Brake fluid level warning lights remain "ON"or come on while driving, there may be aproblem with E.B.D (Electronic Brake ForceDistribution).If this occurs, avoid sudden stops and haveyour vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealeras soon as possible.


53

!

B290A02A-AAT

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

WARNING:Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. The engine coolant is underpressure and could erupt and cause severeburns. Wait until the engine is cool beforeremoving the radiator cap.

The needle on the engine coolant temperaturegauge should stay in the normal range. If itmoves across the dial to "H" (Hot), pull over andstop as soon as possible and turn off the engine.Then open the hood and after the engine hascooled, check the coolant level and the waterpump drive belt. If you suspect cooling systemtrouble, have your cooling system checked bya Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.

B300A01A-AAT

Speedometer

Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibrated inmiles per hour (on the outer scale) and kilome-ters per hour (on the inner scale).

OGK016261

OGK016264

!

B330A03E-AAT

Tachometer

The tachometer registers the speed of yourengine in revolutions per minute (rpm).

OGK016265

CAUTION:The engine should not be raced to such aspeed that the needle enters the red zoneon the tachometer face. This can causesevere engine damage and may void yourwarranty.


54

1. Odometer

The odometer records the total driving distancein miles, and is useful for keeping a record formaintenance intervals.

NOTE:Any alteration of the odometer may voidyour warranty coverage.

2,3 Trip odometer

Records the distance of 2 trips in miles.TRIP A: Distance you have traveled from yourorigination point to a first destination.TRIP B: Distance from the first destination to thefinal destination.

To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, press the resetswitch. When pressed for 1 second, it will resetto 0.

B310B02GK-AAT

Odometer/Trip odometer

Function of digital odometer/trip odom-eterPushing in the reset switch on the right side ofthe speedometer when the ignition switch isturned "ON" will display the following sequence:

HGK028B

Type A

Type B

HGK2061-1

HGK055C

Type A

Type B


55TRIP COMPUTER

B400B04GK-AAT

(If installed)

The trip computer is a microcomputer-con-trolled driver information gauge that displaysinformation related to driving, such as estimateddistance to empty, average speed and drivetime on the LCD.

Reset Switch

o The reset switch is used to zero the multi-functional display mode.

o Pushing in the reset switch on the left side ofthe tachometer changes the display asfollows;

DISTANCE TO EMPTY

AVERAGE SPEED

DRIVE TIME

OGK016400N

Type A

Type B

1. Distance to Empty

o This mode provides the estimated distanceto empty from the current fuel level in the fueltank.

o The trip computer may not register additionalfuel if less than 1.36 gallons (6 liters) of fuelare added to the vehicle.

o When the battery has been reinstalled afterbeing discharged or disconnected, drivemore than 20 miles (32km) for an accuratedistance to empty.

OGK016401N

Type A

Type B


56

3. Drive Time

o This mode indicates the drive time travelledsince the last drive time reset.

o To reset the drive time to zero, press andhold the reset switch for more than 1 secondwhile the drive time is being displayed.

OGK016403N

Type A

Type B

o When the distance to empty is less than 31miles (50 km), the symbol will always comeon and the distance to empty digits willindicate "---" with flash until more fuel isadded.

NOTE:o The distance to empty can differ from

the actual tripmeter according to drivingconditions.

o The distance to empty can vary accord-ing to the driving conditions, drivingpattern or vehicle speed.

OGK016402N

Type A

Type B

2. Average Speed

o This mode indicates the average speedtravelled since the last average speed reset.

o To reset the average speed to zero, pressand hold the reset switch for more than 1second while the average speed is beingdisplayed.

OGK046033N

Type A

Type B


57MULTI GAUGE

B330C02GK-GAT

(If installed)

The multi gauge consists of a torque gauge,instantaneous fuel consumption gauge, andvolt meter.

B330C01GK

Torque gauge

It shows instantaneous change of the torque byrpm.

Instantaneous fuel Consumption gauge

It shows instantaneous fuel consumption ac-cording to driving conditions. The more indi-cated figure is low, the more it indicates efficientdriving situation.

B330C04GK

Volt gauge

It shows moment volt change and makes fordiver correspond to low volt situation.

B330C03GK


58

B340C03E-AAT

Headlight Switch

To operate the headlights, turn the barrel on theend of the multi-function switch. The first posi-tion turns on the parking lights, sidelights, taillights and instrument panel lights. The secondposition turns on the headlights.

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionto turn on the headlight.

HGK2074

MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT SWITCH

B340A01A-AAT

Combination Turn Signal, Headlight andHigh-beam SwitchTurn signal operation

Pulling down on the lever causes the turnsignals on the left side of the car to blink. Pushingupwards on the lever causes the turn signals onthe right side of the car to blink. As the turn iscompleted, the lever will automatically return tothe center position and turn off the turn signalsat the same time. If either turn signal indicatorlight blinks more rapidly than usual, goes on butdoes not blink, or does not go on at all, there isa malfunction in the system. Check for a burned-out fuse or bulb or see your Hyundai dealer.

B340B01A-AAT

Lane Change Signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up ordown to a point where it begins flashing.The lever will automatically return to the centerposition when released.

HGK2079


59

Parking light auto cut

o The purpose of this feature is to prevent thebattery from being discharged. The systemautomatically turns off the parking light whenthe driver removes the ignition key andopens the driver- side door.

o With this feature, the parking light will beturned off automatically if the driver parks onthe side of road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lights on when theignition key is removed, perform the following :1) Open the driver-side door.2) Turn the parking light OFF and ON again

using the light switch on the steering column.

B340D01A-AAT

High-beam Switch

To turn on the headlight high beams, push thelever forward (away from you). The high beamindicator light will come on at the same time. Forlow beams, pull the lever back toward you.

B340G02LZ-GAT

Auto Light (If installed)

To operate the automatic light feature, turn thebarrel on the end of the multi-function switch. Ifyou set the multi-function switch to "AUTO", thetail lights and headlights will be turned automati-cally on or off according to external illumination.

NOTE:Switch on head light manually in foggy,cloudy and rainy conditions.

OGK026223NNOTE:o Never place anything over the sensor

located on the instrument panel, to en-sure better auto light system control.

o Don't clean the sensor using a windowcleaner.

o If your vehicle has window tint or othertypes of coating on the front windshield,the AUTO light system may not workproperly.

OGK026223C

Auto Light Sensor


60

B340E01A-AAT

Headlight Flasher

To flash the headlights, pull the switch levertoward you, then release it. The headlights canbe flashed even though the headlight switch isin the "OFF" position.

HGK2077

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

B350A01A-AAT

Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch

OGK047046N

B350A01GK-AAT

OGK048905

Type A

OGK048901N

Type B

A : Wiper speed control· MIST – Single wipe· OFF – Off· INT – Intermittent wipe· LO – Low wiper speed· HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes

Type A


61

OGK048900N

Type B

The windshield wiper switch has three posi-tions:

(1) Intermittent wiper operation(2)Low-speed operation(3)High-speed operation

NOTE:To prevent damage to the wiper system, donot attempt to wipe away heavy accumula-tions of snow or ice. Accumulated snowand ice should be removed manually. Ifthere is only a light layer of snow or ice,operate the heater in the defrost mode tomelt the snow or ice before using the wiper.

B350B01O-AAT

Windshield Washer Operation

OGK047048N

Type A

OGK048048N

Type B

To use the windshield washer, pull the wiper/washer lever toward the steering wheel.

When the washer lever is operated, the wipersautomatically make two passes across thewindshield. The washer continues to operateuntil the lever is released.

NOTE:o Do not operate the washer more than 15

seconds at a time or when the fluidreservoir is empty.

o In icy or freezing weather, be sure thewiper blades are not frozen to the glassprior to operating the wipers.

o In areas where water freezes in winter,use windshield washer antifreeze.


62

B350C01S-AAT

Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Operation

To use the intermittent wiper feature, place thewiper switch in the "INT" position.

OGK047050NOGK047049N

Mist Wiper Operation

If a single wipe is desired in mist, move thewindshield wiper and washer control lever up.

Type A

OGK048049N

Type B

Type A

OGK048050N

Type B

With the switch in this position, the intervalbetween wipes can be varied from 2 to 10seconds by turning the interval adjuster barrel.


63FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH

B360A04A-AAT

To turn on the front fog lights, push the switch.They will light when the headlight switch is in thesecond position and the ignition key is in the"ON" position.

NOTE:If you turn on the headlight high beams, thefront fog lights will be turned off.

OGK046052

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTERSWITCH

OGK046054-1N

B380A02A-AAT

The rear window defroster and heated outsiderearview mirrors are turned on by pushing in theswitch. To turn the defroster off, push the switcha second time. The rear window defrosterautomatically turns itself off after about 20 min-utes. To restart the defroster cycle, push in theswitch again after it has turned itself off.

Type A

Type B

HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM

B370A01A-AAT

The hazard warning system should be usedwhenever you find it necessary to stop the carin a hazardous location. When you must makesuch an emergency stop, always pull off theroad as far as possible.The hazard warning lights are turned on bypushing in the hazard switch. This causes allturn signal lights to blink. The hazard warninglights will operate even though the key is not inthe ignition.To turn the hazard warning lights off, push theswitch a second time.

OGK066001


64 INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHTCONTROL (RHEOSTAT)

B410A01A-AAT

The instrument panel lights can be made brighteror dimmer by turning the instrument panel lightcontrol knob.

OGK046029

DIGITAL CLOCK

B400A01A-AAT

There are three control buttons for the digitalclock. Their functions are:

H - Push "H" to advance the hour indicated.M - Push "M" to advance the minute indicated.R - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" to

facilitate resetting the clock to the correcttime. When this is done:Pressing "R" between 11 : 01 and 11 : 29changes the readout to 11 : 00.Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 11 : 59changes the readout to 12 : 00.Push the "R" button for 3 seconds to displaya 12 or 24-hour clock.

OGK046056

NOTE:The engine must be running for the rearwindow defroster to operate.

CAUTION:Do not clean the inner side of the rearwindow glass with an abrasive type of glasscleaner or use a scraper to remove foreigndeposits from the inner surface of the glassas this may cause damage to the defrosterelements.

!


65CIGARETTE LIGHTER

B420A02A-AAT

For the cigarette lighter to work, the key mustbe in the "ACC" position or the "ON" position.To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the wayinto its socket. When the element has heated,the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position.Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. Thiscan damage the heating element and create afire hazard.If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter,use only a genuine Hyundai replacement or itsapproved equivalent.

OGK046078

! CAUTION:Do not use electric accessories or equip-ment other than the Hyundai genuine partsin the socket.

DRINK HOLDER

!

B450A02GK-AAT

The drink holder is used for holding cups orcans.To use the passenger's drink holder, push thedrink holder.

OGK046079

WARNING:o Use caution when using the drink hold-

ers. A spilled beverage that is very hotcan injure you or your passengers. Spilledliquids can damage interior trim andelectrical components.

o Do not place objects other than cups orcans in the drink holder. Such objectscan be thrown out in the event of asudden stop or an accident, possiblyinjuring the passengers in the vehicle.

ASHTRAY

B430A01GK-AAT

The front ashtray may be opened by pushingand releasing the ashtray door at its top edge.To remove the ashtray in order to clean it, themetal ash receptacle should be lifted out fromthe ashtray door. Do not attempt to remove theentire ashtray door assembly or damage willresult. To reinstall it, place it in the properposition and press it down in the ashtray door.The ashtray lamp will only illuminate when theexterior body lights are switched on.

OGK046077


66

! WARNING:Be careful that someone’s head, hands andbody are not trapped by a closing sunroof.

SUNROOF

B460A01S-AAT

(If Installed)

The sunroof can be operated with the ignitionkey in the "ON" position.

!

SUNSHADE

B470A01GK-AAT

(If Installed)

The sunshade can be opened and closed bysliding it forward or rearward when the sunroofis closed. The sunshade will open automaticallywhen the sunroof is opened, but it must beclosed manually.

OGK046019

WARNING:Never adjust the sunshade while driving.This could result in loss of control and anaccident that may cause death, seriousinjury, or property damage.

B460B03GK-GAT

Opening the Sunroof System

The sunroof can be electrically opened or closedwith the ignition key in the "ON" position. Thesunroof is moved to its fully open position bypushing the " " switch, and to stop at the desiredposition, push in any switches ( , , Up, Down).To close, press and hold the " " button.Release the button when the sunroof reachesthe desired position.

OGK046017


67

!B460C01GK-AAT

Tilting the Sunroof System

To use the auto tilt feature, press the UP buttonon the overhead console. The sunroof will tilt allthe way open. To stop the sunroof tilting at anypoint, press any sunroof control button.

To close the sunroof, press the DOWN buttonon the overhead console and hold it until thesunroof is closed.

NOTE:After washing the car or after there is rain,be sure to wipe off any water that is on thesunroof before operating it.

OGK046018

B460D03GK-AAT

Manual Operation of Sunroof

If the sunroof does not electrically operate:

1. Remove the cap located in the rear roofpanel by using a coin or screw driver.

OGK046020

WARNING:o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's hands,

arms or body are between the slidingglass and the sunroof sash, as this couldresult in injury.

o Do not place your head or arms out of thesunroof opening at any time.

o While the vehicle is moving, always keepthe head, hands and other parts of thebody of all occupants away from the roofopening. Otherwise, you could be seri-ously injured if the vehicle stops sud-denly or if the vehicle is involved in anaccident.

CAUTION:o Do not open the sunroof in severely cold

temperature or when it is covered withice or snow.

o Periodically remove any dirt that mayhave accumulated on the guide rails.

o Do not press any sunroof control buttonlonger than necessary.Damage to the motor or system compo-nents could occur.

!


68

OGK046034L-1

B460E04GK-AAT

Resetting the Sunroof System

If the battery has been recharged, discon-nected or the sunroof was been opened manu-ally with the hexagonal head wrench, you mayneed to reset the sunroof.

To do this;1. Turn the ignition switch "OFF".2. While pressing " " "up" button turn the

ignition switch "ON".

The resetting was not occur when theignition key is turned "OFF" within 1.5seconds.

3. If the sunroof is set like this, the sunroof isreset with tilting up/down automatically oncefor all.

CAUTION:If the sunroof is not reset, it may not operatenormally.

!

INTERIOR LIGHT

B480A02GK-GAT

Map Light

(1) Push in the map light switch to turn on thedriver side light.

(2) In the "DOOR" position, the interior cour-tesy light comes on when any door isopened regardless of the ignition key posi-tion. The light goes out gradually 6 secondsafter the door is closed.

(3) Push in the map light switch to turn on thefront passenger side light.

2. Insert the hexagonal head wrench providedwith the vehicle into the socket. This wrenchcan be found in the vehicle’s trunk or glovebox.

3. Push and turn the wrench clockwise to closeor counterclockwise to open the sunroof.

OGK046021


69SUNGLASS HOLDER

!

B491A02F-AAT

The sunglass holder is located on the frontoverhead console.Push the end of the cover to open or close thesunglass holder.

OGK046076

WARNING:o Do not keep objects except sunglass

inside the sunglass holder. Such ob-jects can be thrown from the holder inthe event of a sudden stop or an acci-dent, possibly injuring the passengersin the vehicle.

o Do not open the sunglass holder whilethe vehicle is moving. The rear viewmirror of the vehicle can be blocked byan open sunglass holder.

GLOVE BOX

!

B500A01A-AAT

WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in case ofan accident or a sudden stop, the glove boxdoor should be kept closed when the car isin motion.

OGK046075

o To open the glove box, pull on the glove boxrelease lever.

B500B01NF-GAT

Illuminated Glove Box

Opening the glove box will automatically turn onthe light when the multi-function switch is turnedto the first position.


70

B510D01HP-AAT

Outside Rearview Mirror Heater(If Installed)

The outside rearview mirror heater is actuatedin connection with the rear window defroster. Toheat the outside rearview mirror glass, push inthe switch for the rear window defroster. Therearview mirror glass will be heated for defrost-ing or defogging and will give you improved rearvision in inclement weather conditions. Push theswitch again to turn the heater off. The outsiderearview mirror heater automatically turns itselfoff after 20 minutes.

OGK046054-1N

Type A

Type B!

2. Next, adjust the mirror angle by depressingthe appropriate perimeter switch as illus-trated.

CAUTION:o Do not operate the switch continuously

for an unnecessary length of time.o Scraping ice from the mirror face could

cause permanent damage. To removeany ice, use a sponge, soft cloth orapproved deicer.

WARNING:Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the passengerside rear view mirror. It is a convex mirrorwith a curved surface. Any objects seen inthis mirror are closer than they appear.

!

OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR

B510B02A-AAT

Electric Type

OGK046026L

The outside rearview mirrors can be adjustedto your preferred rear vision, both directly be-hind the vehicle, and to the rear of the left andright sides.The remote control outside rearview mirrorswitch controls the adjustments for both theright and left outside mirrors.

To adjust the position of either mirror:

1. Move the selecting switch to the right or leftto activate the adjustable mechanism for thecorresponding door mirror.


71DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REAR VIEWMIRROR

!

B510C02A-AAT

Folding the Outside Rear View Mirrors

To fold the outside rear view mirrors, push themtoward the rear.The outside rear view mirrors can be foldedrearward for parking in narrow areas.

HGK2055

WARNING:Do not adjust or fold the outside rear viewmirrors while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, and an acci-dent which could cause serious injury ordeath.

B520A01A-AAT

Manual Type

Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/night insiderear view mirror. The "night" position is selectedby flipping the tab at the bottom of the mirrortoward you. In the "night" position, the glare ofheadlights of cars behind you is reduced.

OGK046024

B520B02O-GAT

Electric type (If installed)

The electric type day/night inside rearview mir-ror automatically controls the glare of headlightsof the car behind you.

1. Pressing the button turns the auto-dimming function OFF which is indicated bythe green Status Indicator LED turning off.

2. Pressing the button again turns the auto-dimming function ON which is indicated bythe green Status Indicator LED turning on.

NOTE:The mirror defaults to the "ON" positioneach time the vehicle is started.

OGK046025


72 HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP LIGHT

B550A01S-GAT

In addition to the lower-mounted rear stoplightson either side of the car, the high mounted rearstoplight in the center of the rear window orinserted in the rear spoiler also lights when thebrakes are applied.

OGK016550L

Type A Type B Type C

PARKING BRAKE

B530A03A-AAT

Always engage the parking brake before leav-ing the car. This also turns on the parking brakeindicator light when the key is in the "ON" or"START" position. Before driving away, be surethat the parking brake is fully released and theindicator light is off.

Applying the parking brake

To engage the parking brake, first apply the footbrake and then without pressing the releasebutton in, pull the parking brake lever up as faras possible. In addition it is recommended thatwhen parking the vehicle on a gradient, the shiftlever should be positioned in the appropriate lowgear on manual transaxle vehicles or in the P(Park) position on automatic transaxle vehicles.

OGK056005

!

CAUTION:Driving with the parking brake applied willcause excessive brake pad (or lining) andbrake rotor wear.

Releasing the parking brake

To release the parking brake, first apply the footbrake and pull up the parking brake lever slightly.Secondly, depress the release button and lowerthe parking brake lever while holding the button.

!

WARNING:Whenever leaving vehicle or parking alwaysset the parking brake as far as possible andfully engage the vehicle's transaxle into thepark position. Vehicles not fully engaged inpark with the parking brake set are at risk formoving inadvertently and injuring yourselfor others.


73FRONT DOOR EDGE WARNINGLIGHT

B620A01S-AAT

A red light comes on when the front door isopened. The purpose of this light is to assistwhen you get in or out and also to warn passingvehicles.

B620A01GK

HOOD RELEASE

B570A01GK-GAT

1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the hood.

OGK046011LOGK046012LHood Release Lever

2. Press the safety hook lever up and lift thehood.

3. Raise the hood by hand.


74

WARNING:o Gasoline vapors are dangerous. Before

refueling, always stop the engine andnever smoke or allow sparks and openflames near the filler area.

o Never operate your vehicle without afiller cap properly installed, flammablevapors and gasoline could leak out indangerous situations such as a collisionor rollover. If the filler cap must bereplaced, only use genuine Hyundai re-placement parts.

o After refueling, make sure the fuel cap isinstalled securely to prevent fuel spill-age in the event of an accident.

o Tighten the cap until it clicks, otherwisethe " "light will illuminate.

!

OGK046014

REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LIDRELEASE

B560A02MC-AAT

The fuel-filler lid may be opened from inside thevehicle by pulling up on the fuel-filler lid openerlocated on the front floor area on the left side ofthe car.

NOTE:If the fuel-filler lid will not open because icehas formed around it, tap lightly or push onthe lid to break the ice and release the lid. Donot pry on the lid. If necessary, spray aroundthe lid with an approved deicer fluid (do notuse radiator anti-freeze) or move the ve-hicle to a warm place and allow the ice tomelt.

OGK046013

!

When closing the hood, slowly close the hoodand make sure it locks into place.

WARNING:o Always double check to be sure that the

hood is firmly latched before drivingaway. If it is not latched, the hood couldopen while the vehicle is being driven,causing a total loss of visibility, whichmight result in an accident.

o Do not move the vehicle with the hoodin the raised position, as vision is ob-structed and the hood could fall or bedamaged.


75

o If you open the fuel filler cap during highambient temperatures, a slight "pres-sure sound" may be heard. This is nor-mal and not a cause for concern. When-ever you open the fuel filler cap, turn itslowly.

o Do not "top off" after the nozzle auto-matically shuts off when refueling.

o Automotive fuels are flammable/explo-sive materials. When refueling, pleasenote the following guidelines carefully.Failure to follow these guidelines mayresult in severe personal injury, severeburns or death by fire or explosion.

- Before refueling always note the loca-tion of the Emergency Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, at the gas stationfacility.

- Before touching the fuel nozzle or fuelfiller cap, you should eliminate poten-tially dangerous static electricity dis-charge by touching another metal partof the front of the vehicle, a safe dis-tance away from the fuel filler neck,nozzle, or other gas source.

- Do not get back into a vehicle onceyou have begun refueling. Do nottouch, rub or slide against any item orfabric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)

! WARNING: ! WARNING:capable of producing static electric-ity. Static electricity discharge canignite fuel vapors resulting in explo-sion.If you must re-enter the vehicle, youshould once again eliminate poten-tially dangerous static electricity dis-charge by touching a metal part of thevehicle, away from the fuel filler neck,nozzle or other gasoline source.

- When using a portable fuel containerbe sure to place the container on theground prior to refueling. Static elec-tricity discharge from the containercan ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.Once refueling has begun, contactwith the vehicle should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete. Use onlyportable fuel containers designed tocarry and store gasoline.

- Do not use cellular phones around agas station or while refueling any ve-hicle. Electric current and/or electronicinterference from cellular phones canpotentially ignite fuel vapors causinga fire. If you must use your cellularphone use it in a place away from thegas station.

! WARNING:- When refueling always shut the en-

gine off. Sparks produced by electri-cal components related to the enginecan ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.Always insure that the engine is OFFbefore and during refueling. Once re-fueling is complete, check to makesure the fuel filler cap and door aresecurely closed, before starting theengine.

- Do not light any fire around a gasstation. DO NOT use matches or alighter and DO NOT SMOKE or leave alit cigarette in your vehicle while at agas station especially during refuel-ing. Automotive fuel is highly flam-mable and can, when ignited, result inexplosion by flames.

- If a fire breaks out during refueling,leave the vicinity of the vehicle, andimmediately contact the manager ofthe gas station or contact the policeand local fire department. Follow anysafety instructions they provide.


76

B540D01GK-GAT

when you close the tailgate

OGK016540

HGK227

B540C01F-AAT

To Unlock Using the Key

To open the tail gate, insert the key and turn itclockwise to unlock. The tail gate compartmentlight illuminates when the tail gate is opened.

OGK046006

! WARNING:The tail gate should always be kept com-pletely closed while the vehicle is in motion.If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaustgases may enter the car resulting in seriousillness or death to the occupants. See addi-tional warnings concerning exhaust gaseson page 2-2.

TAIL GATE

B540A01F-AAT

Remote Tail Gate Release

To open the tail gate without using the key, pullup the lid release lever located on the driver'sdoor panel.To close, lower the tail gate, then press down onit until it locks. To be sure the tail gate is securelyfastened, always try to pull it up again.

OGK046005


77

! WARNING:Do not close an open tailgate (rear hatch)while a person(s) is sitting upright on therear seat. The tailgate or tailgate glass maycontact the head of a person sitting uprighton the rear seat. Closing the tailgate onto aperson's head may cause serious injuries,including death.

B580A01GK-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visors to givethe driver and front passenger either frontal orsideward shade. To reduce glare or to shut outdirect rays of the sun, turn the sun visor down.A ticket holder is provided on the back of the sunvisor for the driver. Vanity mirrors are providedon the back of the sunvisor for the driver and thefront passenger (If Installed).

NOTE:The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)label containing useful information can befound on the front of each sun visor.

Vanity mirror

HGK2119

SUN VISOR

! WARNING:Do not place the sun visor in such a mannerthat it obscures visibility of the roadway,traffic or other objects.

B580C01JM-AAT

Sun Visor Extender (If Installed)

Your vehicle is equipped with sun visor extend-ers that may be used when the visor is in the sideglass position.

B580C01GK


78 LUGGAGE NET

B540D02HP-GAT

(if installed)

Some objects can be kept in the net in theluggage compartment.Use the luggage net on the floor(If installed) orat the back of the luggage compartment toprevent objects from sliding.

HGK2126

Type B

CAUTION:To prevent damage to the goods or thevehicle, care should be taken when carryingfragile or bulky objects in the luggage com-partment.

!

Type A

HORN

Horn Zone

B610A01S-GAT

Press the pad on the steering wheel to sound thehorn.

OGK046023

!

STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER

B600A01HP-AAT

(If installed)

To adjust the steering wheel:1. Pull the lever toward you and hold it to unlock.2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the

desired position.3. After adjustment, release the lever.

WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheelwhile driving as this may result in loss ofcontrol of the vehicle and serious injury ordeath.

OGK046022


79

B990A03Y-AAT

Floor Mat Anchor

When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet,make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor inyour vehicle. This keeps the floor mat fromsliding forward.

B570A01N

! WARNING:Avoid eye injury. Do not overstretch. Al-ways keep face and body out of recoil path.Do not use when strap has visible signs ofwear or damage.

! WARNING:o Make sure the floor mat is properly placed

on the floor carpet. If the floor mat slipsand interferes with the movement of thepedals during driving, it may cause anaccident.

o Don't put an additional floor mat on thetop of the anchored mat, otherwise theadditional mat may slide forward andinterfere with the movement of the ped-als.

CRUISE CONTROL

B660A02S-AAT

(If Installed)

OGK016660

OGK018660

Type A

Type B


80

! WARNING:To avoid accidental cruise control engage-ment, keep the cruise control main switchoff when not using the cruise control.

B660B01GK-AAT

To Set the Cruise Speed1. Push in the cruise control main switch on the

end of the barrel. The "CRUISE" indicatorlight in the instrument cluster will be illumi-nated. This turns the system on.

2. Accelerate to the desired cruising speedabove 25 mph (40 km/h).

3. Push the control switch downward to "SET(COAST : Type A, ⎯ : Type B)" and releaseit.The "SET" indicator light in the instrumentcluster will illuminate.

4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedaland the desired speed will automatically bemaintained.

5. To momently increase speed, depress theaccelerator pedal enough for the vehicle toexceed the preset speed. When you removeyour foot from the accelerator pedal, thevehicle will return to the speed you have set.

OGK016661

! WARNING:o Cruise control is not recommended for

city driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or other bad weatherconditions.

o Pay particular attention during the down-hill driving with cruise control system asthe vehicle speed can be increased gradu-ally.

The cruise control system provides automaticspeed control for your comfort when driving onfreeways, tollroads, or other noncongestedhighways. This system is designed to functionabove approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

OGK018661

Type B

Type A


81

B660D01E-AAT

To Resume the Preset Speed

OGK016663

B660C01GK-AAT

To Cancel the Cruise SpeedTo disengage the cruise control system, pull thecontrol switch toward the steering wheel to"CANCEL" position.Additionally, the following actions will disengagethe system :

o Depress the brake pedal.o Depress the clutch pedal (Manual transaxle).o Shift the selector lever to "N" position (Auto-

matic transaxle).o Decrease the vehicle speed lower than the

memorized speed by 9 mph (15 km/h).o Decrease the vehicle speed to less than 25

mph (40 km/h).o Release the main switch.

OGK016662

OGK018662

Type B

Type A

OGK018663

Type B

Type A


82

B660E01E-AAT

To Reset at a Faster Speed

1. Push the control switch upward to "RE-SUME (ACCEL : Type A, + : Type B)" positionand hold it.

2. Accelerate to desired speed and release thecontrol switch. While the control switch isheld, the vehicle will gradually gain speed.

B660F03E-AAT

To Reset at a Slower Speed1. Push the control switch downward to "SET

(COAST : Type A, ⎯ : Type B)" and hold it.The vehicle will decelerate.

2. When the desired speed is obtained, releasethe control switch. While the control switchis pushed, the vehicle speed will graduallydecrease.

OGK016661

! WARNING:o Keep the cruise control ON/OFF switch

off when not using the cruise control toavoid inadvertently setting a speed.

o Use the cruise control system only whentraveling on open highways in goodweather.

o Do not use the cruise control when itmay not be safe to keep the car at aconstant speed, for instance, driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slippery(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or windingroads or over 6% up-hill or down-hillroads.

o Pay particular attention to the drivingconditions whenever using the cruisecontrol system.

o During cruise-control driving with amanual transaxle vehicle, do not shiftinto neutral without depressing theclutch pedal, or the engine will beoverrevved. If this happens, depress theclutch pedal or release the main switch.

The vehicle will automatically resume the speedset prior to cancellation when you push thecontrol switch upward to "RESUME (ACCEL :Type A, + : Type B)" position and release it,providing the vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40km/h).

OGK018661

Type B

Type A


83

SEEK (UP / ) Switch

Press the SEEK UP ( ) switch 1 sec. or more.

1. RADIO mode

When the SEEK UP ( ) switch is pressed, theunit will automatically tune to the next higherfrequency.

2. TAPE mode

Pressing the SEEK UP ( ) switch will play thebeginning of the next music segment.

3. CD (compact disc)/CDC(compact disc changer) mode

Press the SEEK UP ( ) switch once to skipforward to the beginning of the next track.

VOL ( / ) Switch

o Press the VOL ( ) button to increasevolume.

o Press the VOL ( ) button to decreasevolume.

AUDIO REMOTE CONTROLSWITCH

B610A02GK-GAT

(If installed)

POWER ON/OFF Switch

Press the POWER ON/OFF switch to selectRadio, Tape, CD (compact disc) and CDC(compact disc changer).

Press the POWER ON/OFF switch once againto cancel Radio, Tape, CD (compact disc) andCDC (compact disc changer).

OGK046086L

!o With the cruise control engaged, when

the brake pedal is applied, it is normal tohear the cruise control system deacti-vate. This is an indication of normalsystem operation.

o During normal cruise control operation,when the "SET(COAST : Type A, ⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯ :Type B)" is activated or reactivated afterapplying the brakes, the cruise controlwill energize after approximately 3 sec-onds. This delay is normal.

WARNING:


84 HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

B710A02GK-GAT

1. Side Defrost Nozzle2. Side Ventilator3. Windshield Defrost Nozzle4. Center Ventilator OGK016003

B710B02O-AAT

Center Ventilator

The center ventilators are located in the middleof the dashboard. To change the direction of theair flow, move the knob in the center of the ventup-and-down and side-to-side. The vents areopened when the vent knob is moved to " "position. The vents are closed when the ventknob is moved to " ". Keep these vents clearof any obstructions.

B710C01JM-AAT

Side Ventilator

The side ventilators are located on each side ofthe dash board. To change the direction of theair flow, move the knob in the center of the ventup-and-down and side-to-side. The vents areopened when the vent knob is moved to " "position. The vents are closed when the ventknob is moved to " ". Keep these vents clearof any obstructions.


85HEATING AND VENTILATION

B670A01GK-GAT

Rotary Type (If Installed)

1. Temperature control switch2. Air intake control switch3. Air flow control switch4. Air Conditioning switch5. Fan speed control switch6. Rear window defroster switch

OGK046038N

B670B01GK-AAT

Fan Speed Control (Blower Control)

This is used to select the fan speed.This blower fan speed, and therefore the vol-ume of air delivered from the system, may becontrolled manually by setting the blower con-trol between the "1" and "4" positions.

OGK046045N

B670E02A-AAT

Temperature Control

This control is used to adjust the degree ofheating or cooling desired.

Cool

OGK046043

Warm


86

B670D04O-AAT

Air Flow Control

This is used to turn the blower fan on/off and todirect the flow of air. Air can be directed to thefloor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Fivesymbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level,Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the inside ofthe vehicle faster. The "OFF" mode is used toturn the blower fan off.

NOTE:If the blower fan is off, the air intake controlis set to the fresh mode automatically.

OGK046039N

B670C02Y-AAT

Air Intake Control

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculation of inside air.

FreshRecirculation

With the " " mode selected, air enters thevehicle from outside and is heated or cooledaccording to the other functions selected.With the " " mode selected, air from withinthe passenger compartment is drawn throughthe heating system and heated or cooled ac-cording to the other functions selected.

NOTE:It should be noted that prolonged opera-tion of the heating system in " " modewill give rise to fogging of the windshieldand side windows and the air within thepassenger compartment will become stale.In addition prolonged use of the air condi-tioning with the " " mode selected mayresult in the air within the passenger com-partment becoming excessively dry.

OGK046044


87

Face-Level

Selecting the "Face" mode will cause air to bedischarged through the side and center venti-lators.

Bi-Level

Air is discharged through the face vents and thefloor vents. This makes it possible to havecooler air from the dashboard vents and warmerair from the floor outlets at the same time.

OGK016095 OGK016096

Floor-Level

Air is discharged through the floor vents, wind-shield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzleand side ventilator.If the "Floor" mode is selected, the "Fresh"mode will be activated.

OGK016097


88

MAX A/C-Level

Air is discharged through the face level vents.If the "MAX A/C" mode is selected, the A/C willturn on automatically and "Recirculation" modewill be activated.

OGK016103

mode except the defrost mode and thefloor-defrost mode. Although the A/Cswitch indicator is turned off, this is normaloperation.

Defrost-Level

Air is discharged through the windshield defrostnozzle, side defroster nozzle, side ventilator.If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C willturn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will beactivated.

NOTE:If the "Floor-Defrost" or "Defrost" mode isselected, the air conditioning will not turnoff by pushing the A/C button.If the air flow control is set to the defrost orthe floor-defrost mode, the A/C will be onautomatically and the A/C will not off untilthe air flow control is set to the another

OGK016099

Floor-Defrost Level

Air is discharged through the windshield defrostnozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzle,side ventilator.If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, the A/Cwill be turn on automatically and "Fresh" modewill be activated.

OGK016098


89

* The A/C or the air intake control switch returnto its former setting.

A/C

ON

ON or OFF *

ON or OFF *

ON

ON

NOTE:o The air intake control switch will change

to " " mode when the ignition switchis turned "ON" with the MAX A/C modeselected.

o When you change to another mode fromMAX A/C, the A/C and the air intakecontrol switch are set to the followingchart.

Air Intake

Control Switch

or *

OGK016095N

OFF-Level

Air is discharged through the windshield de-froster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator.

NOTE:If the air flow control is off, the air intakecontrol is set to the fresh mode automati-cally.

HEATING CONTROLS

B690A02S-AAT

For normal heating operation, set the air intakecontrol to the fresh air ( ) position and theair flow control to the floor ( ) position.

For faster heating, the air intake control switchshould be set in the recirculate ( ) position.

If the windows fog up, set the air flow control tothe defrost ( ) position. (The A/C will turn onautomatically and "Fresh" mode will be acti-vated.)

For maximum heat, move the temperature con-trol to "Warm".

OGK046038A


90

OGK016701N

VENTILATION

B710A01A-AAT

To operate the ventilation system:

o Set the air intake control switch at the freshair ( ) position.

o To direct all intake air to the dashboard vents,set the airflow control to the face ( ) position.

o Adjust the fan speed control to the desiredspeed.

o Set the temperature control between "Cool"and "Warm".

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

B740A01S-AAT

Air Conditioning Switch (If installed)

The air conditioning is turned on or off bypushing the A/C button on the heating/air con-ditioning control panel.

OGK046047

BI-LEVEL HEATING

B700A02A-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level heatingcontrols. This makes it possible to have coolerair from the dashboard vents and warmer airfrom the floor outlets at the same time. To usethis feature:

o Set the air intake control switch to the freshair ( ) position.

o Set the air flow control at the bi-level ( )position.

o Adjust the fan speed control to the desiredspeed.

o Set the temperature control between "Cool"and "Warm".

OGK016700N


91

To use the air conditioning to cool the interior:

o Adjust the air flow control to the desiredposition.

o Turn on the air conditioning switch by push-ing in on the switch. The air conditioningindicator light should come on at the sametime.


o Adjust the fan control to the desired position.o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool"

provides maximum cooling. The tempera-ture may be moderated by moving the con-trol toward "Warm".)

B740B02GK-AAT

Air Conditioning OperationCooling

OGK016704N

o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.For greater cooling, turn the fan control toone of the higher speeds or temporarilyselect the recirculate ( ) position on theair intake control switch.

B740C01GKA-AAT

Dehumidified Heating

For dehumidified heating:

o Adjust the air flow control to the desiredposition.

o Turn on the air conditioning switch. The airconditioning indicator light should come on atthe same time.


o Set the air flow control to the face ( )position.

o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.o For more rapid action, set the fan at one of

the higher speeds.o Adjust the temperature control to provide the

desired amount of warmth.

OGK016705N


92

B740D01A-AAT

Operation Tips

o If the interior of the car is hot when you firstget in, open the windows for a few minutesto expel the hot air.

o When you are using the air conditioningsystem, keep all windows closed to keep hotair out.

o When moving slowly, as in heavy traffic, shiftto a lower gear. This increases engine speed,which in turn increases the speed of the airconditioning compressor.

o On steep grades, turn the air conditioning offto avoid the possibility of the engine over-heating.

o During winter months or in periods when theair conditioning is not used regularly, run theair conditioning once every month for a fewminutes. This will help circulate the lubri-cants and keep your system in peak oper-ating condition.


93DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING

B720A02E-AAT

Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog thewindshield:

To remove interior fog on the windshield;o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The

A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will beactivated.)

o Set the temperature control to the desired position.o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.

To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield;o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The

A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will beactivated.)

o Set the temperature control to warm.o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".

NOTE:When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause fog to formon the exterior windshield. If this occurs, set the air flow control to the face level position ( ) and fan speed controlto the low position.

A Type

OGK016800N OGK016801N

B Type A Type B Type


94 AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM

B970A01Y-AAT

(If lnstalled)

Your Hyundai is equipped with an automaticheating and cooling control system controlledby simply setting the desired temperature.

B970B04GK-GAT

Heating and Cooling Controls

OGK046057C

1. Temperature Control2. Display Window3. Blower Fan Control4. AUTO (Automatic Control)Switch5. Air Flow Control Switch

6. Air Conditioning Switch7. Defroster Switch8. Rear Window Defroster Switch9. Air lntake Control Switch10. OFF Switch


95

B970C01GK-GAT

Automatic Operation

The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature Con-trol) system automatically controls heating andcooling by doing as follows:

1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The display"AUTO" will illuminate confirming that theFace, Floor and/or Bi-Level modes as wellas the blower speed and air conditioner willbe controlled automatically.

2. Turn the "TEMP" knob to set the desiredtemperature.The temperature will increase to the maxi-mum 32°C(90°F) by turning the knob clock-wise.The temperature will decrease to the mini-mum 17°C(62°F) by turning the knob coun-terclockwise.

NOTE:If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, the temperature mode will resetto Centigrade degrees.This is a normal condition and you canchange the temperature mode from Centi-grade to Fahrenheit as follows;Press the "OFF" and "AUTO " switch simul-taneously for 3 seconds.The display shows that the unit of tempera-ture is adjusted to Centigrade or Fahrenheit(°C →→→→→ °F or °F →→→→→ °C).

OGK046058

OGK046061


96

B980A01Y-AAT

Manual Operation

The heating and cooling system can be con-trolled manually as well by pushing buttonsother than the "AUTO" button. In this state, thesystem sequentially works according to theorder of buttons selected.The function of the buttons which are not se-lected will be controlled automatically.Press the "AUTO" button in order to convert toautomatic control of the system.

OGK026223C

Photo Sensor

NOTE:Never place anything over the sensor whichis located on the instrument panel to en-sure better control of the heating and cool-ing system.

B995A01GK-GAT

Outside Temperature Switch

Press the button, the display show that the unitof outside temperature is adjusted to centigradeor fahrenheit (°C → °F or °F → °C).

OGK046066


97

B980B01Y-AAT

Fan Speed Control Switch

The fan speed can be set to the desired speedby turning the fan speed control knob. Thehigher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered.Pressing the "OFF" switch turns off the fan.

OGK046064

OGK046063L

B670C02GK-AAT

Air Intake Control SwitchThis is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculation inside air.To change the air intake control mode, (Freshmode, Recirculation mode) push the controlbutton.

FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light onthe button goes on when the air intake controlis in fresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : The indica-tor light on the button is illuminated when the airintake control is in recirculation mode.

With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters thevehicle from the outside and is heated or cooledaccording to the function selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air fromwithin the passenger compartment will be drawnthrough the heating system and heated orcooled according to the function selected.

OGK046062L


98

B980D01Y-AAT

Heating and Cooling System OffNOTE:It should be noted that prolonged opera-tion of the heating system in "recirculation"mode will give rise to fogging of the wind-shield and side windows and the air withinthe passenger compartment will becomestale. In addition, prolonged use of the airconditioning with the "Recirculation" modeselected may result in the air within thepassenger compartment becoming exces-sively dry.

Press the "OFF" button to stop the operation ofthe heating and cooling system.

OGK046067

B740A01S-AAT

Air Conditioning Switch

The air conditioning is turned on or off bypushing the A/C button on the heating/air con-ditioning control panel.

OGK046065


99

Face-Level

When selecting the "Face" mode, the indicatorlight will come on, causing air to be dischargedthrough the face level vents.

OGK016095

Bi-Level

When selecting the "Bi-Level" mode, the indica-tor light will come on and the air will be dis-charged through the face vents and the floorvents. This makes it possible to have cooler airfrom the dashboard vents and warmer air fromthe floor outlets at the same time.

OGK016096

B980E01GK-GAT

Air Flow Control

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can bedirected to the floor, instrument panel outlets, orwindshield. Four symbols are used to representFace, Bi-Level, Floor and Floor-Defrost airposition.

OGK046059


100

Floor-Defrost Level

When selecting the "Floor-Defrost" mode, theindicator light will come on and the air will bedischarged through the windshield defrostnozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzle,side ventilator.

OGK016098

B980F01GK-AAT

Defrost Switch

When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the " "mode will be automatically selected and the airwill be discharged through the windshield de-frost vents. To assist in defrosting, the airconditioning will operate if ambient temperatureis higher than 35.6°F (2°C) and automaticallyturns off if the ambient temperature drops below32.9 °F (0.5 °C).

OGK046060Floor-Level

When selecting the "Floor-Level" mode, theindicator light will come on and the air will bedischarged through the floor vents, windshielddefroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle, sideventilator.

OGK016097


101

! CAUTION:o Replace the filter every 10,000 miles

(15,000 km) or once a year. If the car isbeing driven in severe conditions suchas dusty, rough roads, more frequentclimate control air filter inspections andchanges are required.

o When the air flow rate is decreased, thesystem should be checked at an autho-rized dealer.

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER(IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT)

B760A06GK-AAT

The climate control air filter is located in front ofthe blower unit behind the glove box.It operates to decrease the amount of pollutantsentering the car.To replace the climate control air filter, refer tothe page 6-16.

B760A01E

Evaporator core

Filter

Heater core

Outside air

Inside air

Inside air

Blower fan


102 STEREO SOUND SYSTEM

Ionosphere

B750A02L

AM reception

Mountains

Buildings

Unobstructedarea

FM radio station

B750A03L

FM reception

B750A01L

Obstructed areaIron bridges

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequen-cies and do not bend to follow the earth'ssurface. Because of this, FM broadcasts gen-erally begin to fade at short distances from thestation. Also, FM signals are easily affected bybuildings, mountains, or other obstructions.These can result in certain listening conditionswhich might lead you to believe a problem existswith your radio. The following conditions arenormal and do not indicate radio trouble:

AM broadcasts can be received at greaterdistances than FM broadcasts. This is becauseAM radio waves are transmitted at low frequen-cies. These long, low frequency radio wavescan follow the curvature of the earth rather thantravelling straight out into the atmosphere. Inaddition, they curve around obstructions so thatthey can provide better signal coverage.

B750A02A-AAT

How Car Audio Works

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast fromtransmitter towers located around your city.They are intercepted by the radio antenna onyour car. This signal is then received by theradio and sent to your car speakers.When a strong radio signal has reached yourvehicle, the precise engineering of your audiosystem ensures the best possible quality repro-duction. However, in some cases the signalcoming to your vehicle may not be strong andclear. This can be due to factors such as thedistance from the radio station, closeness ofother strong radio stations or the presence ofbuildings, bridges or other large obstructions inthe area.

Ionosphere


103

B750A04L B750A05L

o Station Swapping - As an FM signal weak-ens, another more powerful signal near thesame frequency may begin to play. This isbecause your radio is designed to lock ontothe clearest signal. If this occurs, selectanother station with a stronger signal.

o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals beingreceived from several directions can causedistortion or fluttering. This can be caused bya direct and reflected signal from the samestation, or by signals from two stations withclose frequencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the condition has passed.

o Fading - As your car moves away from theradio station, the signal will weaken andsound will begin to fade. When this occurs,we suggest that you select another strongerstation.

o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or largeobstructions between the transmitter andyour radio can disturb the signal causingstatic or fluttering noises to occur. Reducingthe treble level may lessen this effect until thedisturbance clears.

!

B750B05Y-AAT

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,noise may be produced from the audio equip-ment. This does not mean that something iswrong with the audio equipment. In such a case,use the cellular phone at a place as far aspossible from the audio equipment.

WARNING:Hyundai recommends that you never use acell phone while driving. This could resultin loss of control, and an accident that maycause death, serious injury, or propertydamage. You must stop at a safe place touse a cellular phone.

NOTE:Some states and cities have regulationsprohibiting the use of cell phones whiledriving. You should be aware of the specificrequirements in your area.


104 ANTENNA

B870A01A

!

B870A01A-GAT

Fixed Rod Antenna

Your car uses a fixed rod antenna to receiveboth AM and FM broadcast signals.This antenna is a removable type. To removethe antenna, turn the antenna counterclock-wise. To install the antenna, turn the antennaclockwise.

CAUTION:Be sure to remove the antenna before wash-ing the car in an automatic car wash or theantenna may be damaged.

B870D01Y-GAT

Glass Antenna (If Installed)

When the radio power switch is turned on whilethe ignition key is in either the "ON" or "ACC"position, your car will receive both AM and FMbroadcast signals through the antenna in therear window glass.

OGK046085

CAUTION:o Do not clean the inner side of the rear

window glass with an abrasive type ofglass cleaner or use a scraper to removeforeign deposits from the inner surfaceof the glass as this may cause damage tothe antenna elements.

o Avoid adding metallic coating (Such asNi, Cd, and so on). These can disturbreceiving AM and FM broadcast signals.

!


105AUDIO SYSTEM

H280A01GK-GAT

Stereo Radio Operation (H280) (If Installed)

GK_280_NA

1, 2

3

5

7

10

8

4

9

6

1. 2. Power Button and Volume Control3. Radio Band Selection Button4. SCAN Button5. Automatic Channel Selection Button6. Preset Button7. Information Display Screen (LCD)8. AUDIO Select Button9. Manual Channel Selection Control (TUNE

Control)10. EQ Button


106

H280B01GK-GAT

1. Power Button (POWER ON)

Press this button when the ignition switch of theautomobile is set to ACC (1st notch) or ON (2ndnotch) to turn on the power and the audiosystem. Press once again when the audiosystem is on to turn off the power.

2. Volume Control (VOLUME)

Turn the volume control clockwise to increasevolume and counterclockwise to reduce. Thevolume level will be displayed on the screenwhen you adjust the volume.

3. Radio Band Selection Button (FM/AM)

o Press this button to listen to either FM or AM.o The radio will be set to each of the following

modes each time you press the button.FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM

NOTE:Push this button when the power is off toturn on the power automatically.

4. SCAN Button

Press this button to automatically select chan-nels starting from the current channel and playeach channel for 5 seconds.

5. Automatic Channel Selection Button(SEEK)

Press the upper side of the button to automati-cally increase frequency and select and playthe receivable channel. Press the lower side ofthe button to automatically decrease frequencyand select and play the next available channel.

6. Preset Button (1~6)

Press this button to listen to the channelsmemorized to each button. If you want to memo-rize the current channel to the preset button,press the button for more than 1.5 seconds thenthe channel will be memorized to the button witha beep.

7. Information Display Screen (LCD)

A variety of information will be displayed on thescreen including the radio bands (FM1/FM2/AM) while listening to the radio, frequency ofeach channel, the number of preset channeland "ST" for FM stereo broadcasting.

8. AUDIO Select ButtonPress this button to control tone. Each time youpress the button, the mode will switch fromBASS ➟ MIDDLE ➟ TREBLE ➟ FADER ➟BALANCE and the mode will be displayed on thescreen.

BASS

MIDDLE

TREBLE

BALANCE

FADER

Turn the TUNE Controllerclockwise to increase basstone and counterclockwiseto decrease.

Turn the TUNE Controllerclockwise to increasemiddle tone and counter-clockwise to decrease.

Turn the TUNE Controllerclockwise to increasetreble tone and counter-clockwise to decrease.

Turn the TUNE Controllerclockwise to increase rightspeaker volume and coun-terclockwise to increase leftspeaker volume.

Turn the TUNE Controllerclockwise to increase rearspeaker volume and coun-terclockwise to increasefront speaker volume.


107

!

9. Manual Channel Selection Control(TUNE)

Turn this controller while listening to the radio tomanually adjust frequency. Turn clockwise toincrease frequency and counterclockwise toreduce frequency.

10. EQ ButtonEach time you press this button the soundequalizer setting will switch from POP ➟ JAZZ➟ ROCK ➟ CLASSIC ➟ OFF (Not displayed).

CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio system mecha-nism may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not strike or allow anything to impactthe audio system, damage to the systemmechanisms could occur.


108

H280C01GK-GAT

Cassette Tape Player Operation (H280) (If Installed)

GK_280_NA

8

5

7

10

6

1. TAPE MODE Selection Button / TAPESide Selection Button

2. Cassette Tape Deck3. Tape Eject Button4. DOLBY Selection Button5. Fast Rewind6. Fast Forward7. Automatic Previous Track Selection Button8. Automatic Next Track Selection Button9. Section Repeat Button (REPEAT)10. Information Display Screen (LCD)

2

3

5 9 4

1


109

H280D01GK-GAT

1. TAPE MODE Selection Button / TAPESide Selection Button

Press this button to turn to the TAPE mode. Thesystem will play the tape if the tape is inside thedeck and turn off CD or radio if either mode wason.If you press this button while the tape is beingplayed, the other side of the tape will be played.The screen will display "PLAY" along with thedirection of play.

2. Cassette Tape Deck (Tape Insert)

When you insert the tape, push it into the deckwhile the side of tape you want to listen to faceupward. If the ignition switch of the automobileis set to ACC (1st notch) or ON (2nd notch), thetape will be automatically played when youinsert it even if the power of the audio system isoff.

3. Tape EJECT Button

Press this button while the tape is being playedto eject the tape.This will eject the tape even when the ignitionswitch of the automobile is set to OFF.

NOTE:Push this button to turn the power onautomatically when the TAPE is inside andthe power is off.

4. DOLBY Selection Button

Press this button when you play Dolbyized typeto reduce noise in the medium to high bands dueto Dolby effect. The screen will display " " The" " mark will disappear when you press itagain.

5. Fast Rewind (REW)

Press [REW] button while playing the tape torewind the tape to the beginning and the screenwill display "REW." Press it again while rewind-ing to play from the current position.

6. Fast Forward (FF)Press [FF] button while playing the tape to windthe tape to the end and the screen will display"FF." Press it again while winding to play fromthe current position.

7. Automatic Previous Track SelectionButton (TRACK DOWN)

Press [TRACK ] button to rewind the tape tothe beginning of the song you are listening to.While rewinding the tape, the screen will display"AMS." Press the button again while rewindingthe tape to play from the current position.

8. Automatic Next Track Selection But-ton (TRACK UP)

Press [SEEK ] button to wind the tape to thebeginning of the song next to the song you arelistening to. While winding the tape, the screenwill display "AMS." Press the button again whilewinding the tape to play from the current posi-tion.

9. Section Repeat Button (RPT)Press [RPT] button to repeat the song you arelistening to.

10. Information Display Screen (LCD)Various status of cassette tape will be displayedon the screen while listening to the tape such as"PLAY" while playing the tape, the direction ofplay " or ", "FF" and "REW" for fast forwardand rewind, "METAL" for playing metal tapes aswell as "DOLBY" and "RPT."

! CAUTION:o Do not insert anything like coins into the

player slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.



110

H280E01GK-GAT

Compact Disc Player Operation (H280) (If installed)

GK_280_NA

8

4

7

1

6

1. CD Deck2. CD Indicator3. CD EJECT Button4. CD Selection Button5. Fast Backward6. Fast Forward7. Automatic Previous Track Selection Button8. Automatic Next Track Selection Button9. Section Repeat Button10. Information Display Screen (LCD)11. BOOKMAKR Button12. RDM (Random) Button13. SCROLL Button14. FILE Search Knob15. Directory Search Button16. SCAN Button

10

5 9 13

16

14

151112

2

3


111

H280F01GK-GAT

1. CD Deck

Make sure the printed side of the disk facesupward when you insert the disk. If you insertthe disk when the ignition switch of the automo-bile is set to ACC (1st notch) or ON (2nd notch),the CD Deck will automatically play CD even ifthe power was off. This CD Deck can play both12cm and 8cm audio disks. If you insert videoCD, then the screen will display "ERROR DISC"and eject the disk.

2. CD Indicator

This indicator light will be on if the CD is insidethe CDP deck whether the audio system is onor not. This light will go off when the CD isejected.

3. CD Eject Button

Press [ ] button to eject the disk while playingthe disk. This will eject the CD whether or not theignition switch is on or off.

4. CD Selection Button

Press this button while the disk is inside the CDPdeck to listen to the CD even if the radio or tapewas on or if CD changer was in action. If youpress [CD/MP3] button when the disk is ejectedand hanging in the opening, the system willautomatically insert the disk and play the CD.

5. Fast Backward (REW)

Press and hold [REW] button while playing CDthen the player will play the disk backwards 5times the regular speed for first 5 seconds and15 times faster after that. The sound will bereduced by 12dB while you are holding thebutton.

6. Fast Forward (FF)

Press and hold [FF] button while playing CDthen the player will play the disk forward 5 timesthe regular speed for first 5 seconds and 15times faster after that. The sound will be re-duced by 12dB while you are holding the button.

NOTE:If you press this button when the power isoff and CD is inside the deck, the power willbe automatically turned on.

7. Automatic Previous Track SelectionButton

Press [TRACK ] button to go to the beginningof the song you are listening to while playing theCD. Press the button again to go to the beginningof the song before the song you were listeningto. When you press this button while listening tothe first track of the CD then the system willmove to the beginning of the last track of the CD.

8. Automatic Next Track Selection But-ton

Press [SEEK ] button to go to the beginningof the song next to the song you are listening towhile playing the CD.

9. Section Repeat Button (RPT)

Press [RPT] button to repeat the song you arelistening to. Press this button again to cancelrepetition.

10. Information Display Screen (LCD)Various status of the CD will be displayed on thescreen while listening to the CD such as "CD"while playing the CD, the track title and number,RPT, RDM and MARK.

11. BOOKMARK ButtonThis button lets you select the songs you wantto listen to in the CD. Move to the track and press[MARK] for more than 1 second then the screenwill display "M" and select the track. Press thebutton less than 1 second to play the songs youselected and the system will display "M"

12. RDM (Random) ButtonPress [RDM] button to play the songs in randomorder.


112

!13. SCROLL ButtonIf the title of MP3 or WMA file is too long, pressthis button to scroll the entire song title on theLCD screen.

14. FILE Search KnobTurn this knob to the left and right while listeningto CD to change track number. If you press thebutton within 5 seconds then the selected trackwill be played. If you do not press the buttonwithin 5 seconds then it will display the currentlyplayed track.

15. Directory Search ButtonIn case the MP3/WMA CD contains more than2 folders, press this button up and down tosearch each directory. You can move to thedirectory and turn the search knob to searchthrough the tracks. If you do not press the knobwithin 5 seconds after you select a track thenthe system will automatically return to the cur-rent track.

16. SCAN ButtonIf you press this button, the player will play 10seconds of each track. Press it again to cancelscanning.

CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage to theunit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into theplayer slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.



o Off-road or rough surface driving maycause the compact disc to skip. Do notuse the compact disc when driving insuch conditions as damage to the com-pact disc face could occur.

o Do not attempt to grab or pull the com-pact disc out while the disc is beingpulled into the audio unit by the self-loading mechanism. Damage to theaudio unit and compact disc could oc-cur.

o Avoid using recorded compact discs inyour audio unit. Original compact discsare recommended.

NOTE:When you use CD-R or CD-RW, the CD maynot be played due to the manufacturingmethod of CD makers and the recordingmethod of the user. In this case, change CDunless the continuous use of such CDsmay cause damage to the system.


113

H265A01GK-GAT

Stereo Radio Operation (H265) (If installed)

GK_265_NA

8

7

2

1

4

3 5

6

1. Power Button and Volume Control (PowerOn / Volume)

2. Radio Band Selection Button3. Automatic Channel Selection

Button(SEEK)4. Manual Channel Selection Control (TUNE)5. Preset Button6. Information Display Screen (LCD)7. SCAN Button8. AUDIO Select Button


114

H265B01GK-GAT

1. Power Button and Volume Control(POWER ON/ VOLUME)

Press this button when the ignition switch of theautomobile is set to ACC (1st notch) or ON (2ndnotch) to turn on the power of the audio system.When the power is turned on, turn the volumecontrol clockwise to increase volume and coun-terclockwise to reduce. Press once again whenthe audio system is on to turn off the power.


North American Standardo Press this button to listen to either FM or AM.o The radio will be set to each mode each time

you press the button in a loop;FM1➟FM2➟AM➟FM1 and soon.

European Standardo Press this button to listen to either FM or AM.o The radio will be set to each mode each time

you press the button in a loop;FM1➟FM2➟MW➟LW➟FM1 and soon.


Press this button but do not hold for no more than2 seconds to listen to the channels memorizedto each button. If you want to memorize thecurrent channel to the preset button when youare listening to channel not memorized to any ofthe preset buttons, press the button and hold formore than 2 seconds then the channel will bememorized to the button with the beep.


A variety of information will be displayed on thescreen including the radio bands (FM1/FM2/AM) while listening to the radio, frequency ofeach channel, the number of preset channeland "ST" for FM stereo broadcasting.

7. Automatic Channel Scan Button

Press this button to automatically select nextavailable channel and play the channel for 5seconds and continuously move to the nextavailable channel and play. Press again whenyou find the channel you would like to listen towhile scanning, press the button again to stopscanning and continue to listen to the channelyou selected. And continue to listen to thecurrent channel.


Press and hold the [ ] button for more than 0.5seconds until you hear the beep to automaticallyincrease frequency and press and hold the [ ] button for more than 0.5 seconds until you hearthe beep to automatically decrease frequency toselect and play the next available channel. If thereceived channel is memorized in the presetbuttons then the screen will display the memo-rized channel.


Press and hold [ ] button for less than 0.5seconds to increase frequency by 1 step and[ ] to decrease.Press and hold [ ] or [ ] button for more than0.5 seconds even after you hear the beep thenthe frequency will increase or decrease quickly.When you release the button, the system willturn to the automatic selection mode.


115

8. AUDIO Select Button

o Press this button to change AUDIO functioncontrol mode.

Current State➟BASS➟MID➟TRE➟ FAD➟BALo Select the audio control mode you want and

increase or decrease the setting by ±10 fromcurrently audio control mode. If no actionsare taken, the screen will return to the pre-vious display after 3 seconds. !

BASS

MIDDLE

TREBLE

BALANCE








FADER Turn the TUNE Controllerclockwise to increase rearspeaker volume and coun-terclockwise to increasefront speaker volume.


116

H265C01GK-GAT


GK_265_NA

11

4

2

9

10

1. CD DECK2. CD INDICATOR3. CD Disc EJECT Button4. CD Selection Button5. Fast Backward6. Fast Forward7. Automatic Previous Track Selection Button8. Automatic Next Track Selection Button9. Section Repeat Button10. Information Display Screen (LCD)11. SCAN Button

7 5 6 8

3

1


117

H265D01GK-GAT

1. CD Deck

Make sure the printed side of the disk facesupward when you insert the disk. If you insertthe disk when the ignition switch of the automo-bile is set to ACC (1st notch) or ON (2nd notch),the CD DECK will automatically play CD even ifthe power was off.This CD DECK can play both 12cm and 8cmaudio disks. If you insert video CD, then thescreen will display the status of the CD but it willnot play the video file and therefore there will beno sound.

2. CD Indicator

This indicator light will be on if the CD is insidethe CD DECK if the ignition switch of the auto-mobile is set to ACC (1st notch) or ON (2ndnotch) regardless of whether the audio systemis on or off. This light will go off when the CD isejected.

3. CD Eject Button

Press [ ] button to eject the disk while playingthe disk. This will eject the CD whether or not theignition switch is on or off.

4. CD Selection Button

Press this button while the disk is inside the CDDECK to listen to the CD. If the radio was onpreviously then it will be turned off and CD playerwill be activated. If you press [CD] button whenthe disk is ejected and hanging in the opening thesystem will automatically insert the disk andplay the CD.






Press [ ] button to go to the beginning of thesong you are listening to while playing the CD.Press the button again to go to the beginning ofthe song before the song you were listening to.When you press this button while listening to thefirst track of the CD then the system will moveto the beginning of the last track of the CD.

8. Automatic Next Track Selection But-ton

Press [ ] button to go to the beginning of thesong next to the song you are listening to whileplaying the CD. When you press this buttonwhile listening to the last track of the CD then thesystem will move to the beginning of the firsttrack of the CD.




Various status of the CD will be displayed on thescreen while listening to the CD such as "CD"while playing the CD, the track title and numberand RPT.


118

11. SCAN ButtonIf you press this button, the player will play 10seconds of each track. Press it again to cancelscanning.

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality








119

H465A01GK-GAT

Stereo Radio Operation (H465) (If Installed)

GK_465_NA

1, 2

3

5

8

4

9

6

7

1. 2. Power Button and Volume Control3. Radio Band Selection Button4. SCAN Button5. Automatic Channel Selection Button6. Manual Channel Selection Control (TUNE Control)7. Preset Button8. Information Display Screen (LCD)9. AUDIO Select Button


120

H465B01GK-GAT

1. Power Button (POWER ON)

Press this button when the ignition switch of theautomobile is set to ACC (1st notch) or ON (2ndnotch) to turn on the power and the audiosystem. Press once again when the audiosystem is on to turn off the power.

2. Volume Control (VOLUME)

Turn the volume control clockwise to increasevolume and counterclockwise to reduce. Thevolume level will be displayed on the screenwhen you adjust the volume.


o Press this button to listen to either FM or AM.o The radio will be set to each of the following

modes each time you press the button.FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM

NOTE:Push this button when the power is off toturn on the power automatically.

4. SCAN Button

Press this button to automatically select chan-nels starting from the current channel and playeach channel for 5 seconds. Press again tokeep listening to the channel currently selected.


Press the [SEEK ] button to automaticallyincrease frequency and press the [TRACK ] button to automatically decrease frequency toselect and play the next available channel. If thereceived channel is memorized in the presetbuttons then the screen will display the memo-rized channel.


Turn the TUNE control clockwise to increasefrequency and counterclockwise to reduce fre-quency by 1 step for each click.


Press this button to listen to the channelsmemorized to each button. If you want to memo-rize the current channel to the preset button,press the button for more than 1.5 seconds thenthe channel will be memorized to the button witha beep.

8. Information Display Screen (LCD)A variety of information will be displayed on thescreen including the radio bands (FM1/FM2/AM) while listening to the radio, frequency ofeach channel, the number of preset channeland "ST" for FM stereo broadcasting.

9. AUDIO Select Button

Press this button to control tone. Each time youpress the button, the mode will switch fromBASS➟MIDDLE➟TREBLE➟FADER➟BALANCEand the mode will be displayed on the screen.

BASS

MIDDLE

TREBLE





121

!

BALANCE

FADER


Turn the TUNE Controllerclockwise to increase rearspeaker volume and coun-terclockwise to increasefront speaker volume.





122

H465C01GK-GAT


GK_465_NA

109

1

8

1. CD Deck2. CD Load Button3. CD Eject Button4. Information Display Screen (LCD)5. CD Changer Selection Button6. Disc Selection Button7. Fast Backward8. Fast Forward9. Automatic Previous Track Selection Button10. Automatic Next Track Selection Button11. Repeat Button12. SCAN Button13. EQ Button14. MARK Button15. RDM Button16. File Search Knob17. Scroll Button18. Directory Search Button

7 11 17

4

16

181415

5

3

12

132

6


123

H465D01GK-GAT

1.CD Deck

The deck will open only when you press [LOAD]button. Make sure the printed side of the diskfaces upward when you insert the disk. The CDchanger can only play 12cm disks. If you insertvideo CD or DATA CD, then the screen willdisplay "ERROR DISC," eject the disk andreturn to the previous mode.

2. CD Load Button

When you press [LOAD] button, the empty lotsof the CD Changer will be opened in the orderof 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. When you insert CD, youcan listen to the corresponding CD. In this case,the last CD you inserted will be played. If you donot take any actions after pressing (LOAD) thenthe (LOAD) will be cancelled.

3. CD Eject Button

When you press [ ] button, the currentlyplayed CD will be ejected. If you press the buttonfor more than 2 seconds, you will be able to ejectall CDs. If currently played CD is in the 3rd slot,the ejection order will be 3, 4, 5, 6, 1 and 2.


This shows the location of disk inside the CDChanger and the corresponding CD deck num-ber will flicker when you load or eject the CD.

5. CD Changer Selection Button

If the power was turned off when the CD is insidethe CD changer or if you press "CD" buttonwhen radio was on, the system will play CD. Ifyou press [CD] button when there is no CD inthe changer then the system will display "NODISK" for 2 seconds and return to the previousmode.

NOTE:If you press this button when the power isoff and CD is inside the deck, the power willbe automatically turned on.

6. Disc Selection Button

If you press [DISC ] button while using CDChanger, the next disc will be played (If youpress the button when you are listening to CD1, the CD 2 will be played).If you wish to listen to the previous CD, thenpress [DISC ] button then the previous discwill be played (If you press the button when youare listening to CD 2, the CD 1 will be played).If the CD Changer is not fully loaded, this willmove to the next available deck. When theplayer moves from deck to deck, the screen willdisplay the selected deck number.






Press [TRACK ] button to go to the beginningof the song you are listening to while playing theCD. Press the button again to go to the beginningof the song before the song you were listeningto.

10. Automatic Next Track SelectionButton

Press [SEEK ] button to go to the beginningof the song next to the song you are listening towhile playing the CD.


124



12. SCAN Button

If you press this button, the player will play 10seconds of each track. Press it again to cancelscanning.

13. EQ Button

Each time you press this button the soundequalizer setting will switch fromPOP➟JAZZ➟ROCK➟CLASSIC➟OFF (Notdisplayed).

14. BOOKMARK Button

This button lets you select the songs you wantto listen to in the CD. Move to the track and press(MARK) for more than 1 second then the screenwill display " M " and select the track. Press thebutton less than 1 second to play the songs youselected and the system will display " M "

15. RDM (Random) ButtonPress [RDM] button to play the songs in randomorder.

NOTE:When you use CD-R or CD-RW, the CD maynot be played due to the manufacturingmethod of CD makers and the recordingmethod of the user. In this case, change CDunless the continuous use of such CDsmay cause damage to the system.

16. FILE Search Knob

Turn this knob to the left and right while listeningto CD to change track number. If you press thebutton within 5 seconds then the selected trackwill be played. If you do not press the buttonwithin 5 seconds then it will display the currentlyplayed track.

17. SCROLL Button

If the title of MP3 or WMA file is too long, pressthis button to scroll the entire song title on theLCD screen.

18. Directory Search Button

In case the MP3/WMA CD contains more than2 folders, press this button up and down tosearch each directory. You can move to thedirectory and turn the search knob to searchthrough the tracks. If you do not press the knobwithin 5 seconds after you select a track thenthe system will automatically return to the cur-rent track.

CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality







o Avoid using recorded compact discs inyour audio unit. Original compact discsare recommended.

!


125CARE OF CASSETTE TAPESCARE OF DISCS

B850A02F-AAT

Proper Handling

B850A01L

Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop thedisc. Hold the disc so you will not leave finger-prints on the surface. If the surface is scratched,it may cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Donot affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on thedisc. Do not write on the disc.

Damaged Disc

Do not attempt to play damaged, warped orcracked discs. These could severely damagethe playback mechanism.

Storage

When not in use, place your discs in theirindividual case and store them in a cool placeaway from the sun, heat, and dust.Do not grip or pull out the disc with your handwhile the disc is being pulled into the unit by theself loading mechanism.

Keep Your Discs Clean

B850A02L

Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of a disccould cause the pickup to skip signal tracks.Wipe the surface clean with a clean soft cloth.If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a cleansoft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergentto wipe it clean.

B860A01A-AAT

Proper care of your cassette tapes will extendthe tape life and increase your listening enjoy-ment. Always protect your tapes and cassettecases from direct sunlight, severely cold anddusty conditions. When not in use, cassettesshould always be stored in the original protec-tive cassette case. When the vehicle is very hotor cold, allow the interior temperature to becomemore comfortable before listening to your cas-settes.

B860A01L


126

Head

Cotton applicator

OGK016062

B860A02L

o Never leave a cassette inserted in the playerwhen not being played. This could damagethe tape player unit and the cassette tape.

o We strongly recommend against the use oftapes longer than C-60 (60 minutes total).Tapes such as C-120 or C-180 are very thinand do not perform as well in the automotiveenvironment.

o The playback head, capstan and pinch roll-ers will develop a coating of tape residue thatcan result in deterioration of sound quality,such as a wavering sound. They should becleaned monthly using a commercially avail-able head cleaning tape or special solutionavailable from audio specialty shops. Followthe supplier's directions carefully and neveroil any part of the tape player unit.

o Always be sure that the tape is tightly woundon its reel before inserting in the player.Rotate a pencil in the drive sprockets to windup any slack.

o Be sure that the cassette label is not looseor peeling off or tape ejection may be difficult.

o Never touch or soil the actual audio tapesurfaces.

o Keep all magnetized objects, such as elec-tric motors, speakers or transformers awayfrom your cassette tapes and tape playerunit.

o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place with theopen side facing down to prevent dust fromsetting in the cassette body.

o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage to replayone given tune or tape section. This cancause poor tape winding to occur, and even-tually cause excessive internal drag andpoor audio quality in the cassette. If thisoccurs, it can sometimes be corrected byfast winding the tape from end to end severaltimes. If this does not correct the problem, donot continue to use the tape in your vehicle.


127

B860A03L

NOTE:Look at a tape before you insert it.If the tape is loose, tighten it by turning oneof the hubs with a pencil or your finger.If the label is peeling off, do not put it in thedrive mechanism.Do not leave tapes sitting where they areexposed to hot, warm, or high humidity,such as on top of the dashboard or in theplayer.If a tape is exposed to excessively hot orcold, let it reach a moderate temperaturebefore putting it in the player.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ............................ 2-2Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-3Key Positions ................................................................ 2-4Starting .......................................................................... 2-5Operating the Manual Transaxle ................................... 2-6Automatic Transaxle ..................................................... 2-8Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................. 2-12Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............................... 2-13Good Braking Practices .............................................. 2-14Driving for Economy ................................................... 2-15Winter Driving ............................................................. 2-16Trailer or Vehicle Towing ............................................ 2-19Vehicle Load Limit ....................................................... 2-22

2

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2

WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!C010A01GK-AAT

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.

o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a changein the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaust system checkedas soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.

o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garage anylonger than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intakeset at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clearof snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

!

! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle,contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluidscontained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancerand birth defects or other reproductive harm.

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

3BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

C020A02A-AAT

Before you start the engine, you should always:

1. Look around the vehicle to be sure there areno flat tires, puddles of oil, water or otherindications of possible trouble.

2. After entering the car, check to be sure theparking brake is engaged.

3. Check that all windows, and lights are clean.4. Check that the interior and exterior mirrors

are clean and in position.5. Check your seat, seatback and headrest to

be sure they are in their proper positions.6. Close all the doors.7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that all

other occupants have fastened theirs.8. Turn off all lights and accessories that are

not needed.9. When you turn the ignition switch to "ON",

check that all appropriate warning lights areoperating and that you have sufficient fuel.

10.Check the operation of warning lights and allbulbs when key is in the "ON" position.

TO START THE ENGINE

C030A01A-AAT

Combination Ignition Switch

o If your Hyundai is equipped with a manualtransaxle, place the shift lever in neutral anddepress the clutch pedal fully.

o If your Hyundai has an automatic transaxle,place the shift lever in "P" (park).

o To start the engine, insert the ignition key andturn it to the "START" position. Release it assoon as the engine starts. Do not hold thekey in the "START" position for more than 15seconds.

NOTE:o For safety, the engine will not start if the

clutch pedal is not depressed fully(Manual transaxle) or the shift lever isnot in "P" or "N" Position (Automatictransaxle).

o The ignition key cannot be turned from"ACC" position to "LOCK" position un-less the shift lever is in the "P" (Park)position or the negative battery terminalis disconnected from the battery. Toremove the key, always confirm that theshift lever is securely positioned in "P"(Park) (For Automatic transaxle)

! WARNING:o All passengers must be properly belted

whenever the vehicle is moving. Refer topages: 1-16 through 1-20 for more infor-mation on their proper use.

o Always check the surrounding areas nearyour vehicle for people, especially chil-dren, before putting a car into 'drive.'

o Always wear appropriate shoes whenoperating your vehicle.Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots,etc.) may interfere with your ability touse the brake and accelerator pedal, andthe clutch (if installed).


4

C070C03A-AAT

To Remove the Ignition KeyNOTE:Do not hold the key in the "START" position

for more than 15 seconds.

o "ON"

When the key is in the "ON" position, the ignitionis on and all accessories may be turned on. Ifthe engine is not running, the key should not beleft in the "ON" position. This will discharge thebattery and may also damage the ignition sys-tem.

o "ACC"

With the key in the "ACC" position, some elec-trical accessories (radio, etc.) may be oper-ated.

o "LOCK"

The key can be removed or inserted in thisposition. To protect against theft, the steeringwheel locks by removing the key.

NOTE:If difficulty is experienced in turning theignition key to the START position, turn thesteering wheel right and left to release thetension and then turn the key.

1. Turn the ignition key counterclockwise fromthe "ACC" position to the "LOCK" position.

2. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"position.

3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"position.

C070C01E-1

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

!

KEY POSITIONS

C040A02A-AAT

WARNING:The engine should not be turned off or thekey removed from the ignition key cylinderwhile the vehicle is in motion. The steeringwheel is locked by removing the key.

o "START"

The engine is started in this position. It will crankuntil you release the key.

C040A01E-1

LOCK

ACC

ON

START


5STARTING

!

C050A01A-AAT

WARNING:Never run the engine in a closed or poorlyventilated area any longer than is needed tomove your car in or out of the area. Thecarbon monoxide gas emitted is odorlessand can cause serious injury or death.

C050A01E-1

LOCK ON

START

C050B02A-AAT

Normal Conditions:The Starting Procedure:

1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and place the

gearshift lever (manual transaxle) in neutralor the selector lever (automatic transaxle) in"P" (park) position.

3. After turning the ignition key to the "ON"position, make certain all warning lights andgauges are functioning properly before start-ing the engine.

WARNING:Be sure that the clutch is fully depressedwhen starting a manual transaxle vehicle.Your manual transaxle equipped vehiclewill not start unless the clutch pedal is fullydepressed. On a manual transaxle equippedvehicle that can be started without de-pressing the clutch, there is the potential tocause damage to the vehicle or injury tosomeone inside or outside the vehicle as aresult of the forward or backward move-ment of the vehicle that will occur if theclutch is not depressed when the vehicle isstarted.

!

4. Turn the ignition key to the "Start" positionand release it when the engine starts.After the engine has started, allow the engineto run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placingthe vehicle in gear.The starter should not be operated for morethan 15 seconds at a time. Wait 15-30 sec-onds between starting attempts to protectthe starter from overheating.

! WARNING:Always fully depress the brake pedal beforeand while shifting out of the "P" Park posi-tion into another position to avoid inad-vertent motion of the vehicle which couldinjure persons in or around the car.


6

CAUTION:o Do not downshift more than 2 gears or

downshift the gear when the engine isrunning at high speed (5,000 RPM orhigher). Such downshifting may dam-age the engine.

o When downshifting from fifth gear tofourth gear, caution should be taken notto inadvertently press the gear shift leversideways in such a manner that secondgear is engaged. Such a drastic down-shift may cause the engine speed toincrease to the point that the tachometerwill enter the red zone. Such over revvingof the engine may possibly cause enginedamage.

!

o If you 've come to a complete stop andit's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse),put the shift lever in N(Neutral) positionand release the clutch. Press the clutchpedal down, and then shift into 1st orR(Reverse) gear position.

o Do not use the shift lever as a handrestduring driving, as this can result in pre-mature wear of the transaxle shift forks.

OPERATING THE MANUALTRANSAXLE

C070A04GK-AAT

Your Hyundai's manual transaxle has a con-ventional shift pattern. This shift pattern is im-printed on the shift knob. The transaxle is fullysynchronized in all forward gears so shifting toeither a higher or a lower gear is easily accom-plished.

HGK3023

Type A Type B

When shifting into reverse gear, pull the mis-shift prevention tab and shift into reverse gearposition. (B Type: 6 speed type)

NOTE:o To shift into reverse, rest the lever in

neutral for at least 3 seconds after yourcar is completely stopped. Then movethe lever into the reverse position.

o During cold weather, shifting may bedifficult until the transaxle lubricant haswarmed up. This is normal and not harm-ful to the transaxle.

HGK3024

Type B

Mis-shiftpreventiontab


7

C070B01A-AAT

Using the Clutch

The clutch should be pressed all the way to thefloor before shifting, then released slowly. Theclutch pedal should always be fully returned tothe original position. Do not rest your foot on theclutch pedal while driving. This can cause un-necessary wear.Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the caron an incline. This causes unnecessary wear.Use the foot brake or parking brake to hold thecar on an incline. Do not operate the clutch pedalrapidly and repeatedly.

C070D04A-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never take the car out of gear and coastdown a hill. This is extremely hazardous.Always leave the car in gear.

o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause themto overheat and malfunction. Instead, whenyou are driving down a long hill, slow downand shift to a lower gear. When you do this,engine braking will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.This will help avoid over-revving the engine,which can cause damage.

o Slow down when you encounter cross winds.This gives you much better control of yourcar.

o Be sure the car is completely stopped beforeyou attempt to shift into reverse. Thetransaxle can be damaged if you do not. Toshift into reverse, depress the clutch, movethe shift lever to neutral, wait three seconds,then shift to the reverse position.

o Exercise extreme caution when driving on aslippery surface. Be especially careful whenbraking, accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt change in ve-hicle speed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go out ofcontrol.

! WARNING:o Always buckle-up! In a collision, an

unbelted occupant is significantly morelikely to be seriously injured or killedthan a properly belted occupant.

o Avoid high speeds when cornering orturning.

o Do not make quick steering wheel move-ments, such as sharp lane changes orfast, sharp turns.

o The risk of rollover is greatly increased ifyou lose control of your vehicle at high-way speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadway andthe driver oversteers to reenter the road-way.

o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back into the travellanes.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.


8

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or if thebattery has been disconnected, may besomewhat abrupt. This is a normal condi-tion, and the shifting sequence will adjustafter shifts are cycled a few times by theT.C.M (Transaxle Control Module).

HGK3040

! CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" position while thevehicle is moving.

C070E01GK-AAT

Recommended Shift Points

The shift points as shown below are recom-mended for optimum fuel economy and perfor-mance.

Shift

from-to

1-2

2-3

3-4

4-5

Recommended

15 mph (20 km/h)

25 mph (40 km/h)

35 mph (55 km/h)

45 mph (75 km/h)

Shift

from-to

1-2

2-3

3-4

4-5

5-6

Recommended

10 mph (15 km/h)

20 mph (35 km/h)

30 mph (50 km/h)

45 mph (70 km/h)

60 mph (95 km/h)

Type A (5 speed)

Type B (6 speed)

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

C090A03Y-AAT

The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxlehas four forward speeds and one reversespeed. The individual speeds are selected au-tomatically, depending on the position of thespeed selector lever. The selector lever has 2gates; the main gate and the manual gate.

NOTE:For information on manual gate operation,refer to "Sports Mode".

In the main gate, the selector lever has 4positions, and is equipped with a button to avoidinadvertent selection.

HGK3025


9

!

C090B01A-AAT

The function of each position is as fol-lows:

o P (Park):

Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked orwhile starting the engine. Whenever parking thecar, apply the parking brake and shift the selec-tor lever to the "P" (Park) position.

CAUTION:Never place the selector lever in the "P"(Park) position unless the vehicle is fullystopped. Failure to observe this cautionwill cause severe damage to the transaxle.

NOTE:Depress the brake pedal and pushthe button when shifting.

Push the button when shifting.

The selector lever can be shiftedfreely.

The indicator lights in the instrument clusterindicate the selector lever position when theignition is switched "ON". During the sportsmode operation, the gear currently in use dis-plays in the numeral indicator.

C090E02O-AAT

o D(Drive):

Use for normal driving. Bring the car to acomplete stop before shifting the selector leverto "D" position. The transaxle will automaticallyshift through a four gear sequence.

C090D02O-AAT

o N (Neutral):

In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral,which means that no gears are engaged. Theengine can be started with the shift lever in "N"position, although this is not recommendedexcept if the engine stalls while the car ismoving.

C090C01A-AAT

o R(Reverse):

Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car toa complete stop before shifting the selectorlever to "R" position.

C090F02GK-GAT

Sports Mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion,sports mode is selected by pushing the selectorlever from the "D" position into the manual gate.To return to "D" range operation, push theselector lever back into the main gate.In sports mode, moving the selector lever back-wards and forwards can make rapid gearshiftssimple. In contrast to a manual transaxle, thesports mode allows gearshifts with the accel-erator pedal depressed.UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift upone gear.DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backwards once toshift down one gear.

HGK3027


10

!

C090I04L-GAT

CAUTION:o Shift into "R", "D" and "P" position only

when the vehicle has completelystopped.

o Do not accelerate the engine in reverseor any of the forward positions with thebrakes applied.

o Always apply the footbrake when shift-ing from "P" or "N", to "R", "D"position.

o Do not use the "P" (Park) position inplace of the parking brake. Always setthe parking brake, shift the transaxleinto "P" (Park) position and turn off theignition when you leave the vehicle, evenmomentarily. Never leave the vehicleunattended while the engine is running.

o Check the automatic transaxle fluid levelregularly, and add fluid as necessary.

o When accelerating from a stop on asteep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-dency to roll backwards. Shifting theshift lever into 2nd gear while in Sportmode will help prevent the vehicle fromrolling backwards.

o See the maintenance schedule for theproper fluid recommendation.

! CAUTION:o In sports mode, the driver must execute

shifts in accordance with prevailing roadconditions, taking care to keep the en-gine speed below the red zone.

o For engine protection, upward shifts aremade automatically when the enginerpm reaches the red zone.

o By rapidly moving the selector leverbackwards (-) twice it is possible to skipone gear by using the sports mode.Since sudden engine braking and/orrapid acceleration can cause a loss oftraction, however, downshifts must bemade carefully in accordance with thevehicle's speed.

NOTE:o In sports mode, only the four forward

gears can be selected. To select reverseor park, move the selector lever to the "R"or "P" position as required.

o In sports mode, downward shifts aremade automatically when the vehicleslows down. When the vehicle stops, 1stgear is automatically selected.

o To maintain the required levels of ve-hicle performance and safety, the sys-tem may not execute certain gearshiftswhen the selector lever is operated.

o Before driving away from a stop on aslippery road, push the selector leverforward into the +(UP) position. Thiscauses the transaxle to shift into 2ndgear which is better for smooth drivingaway on a slippery road. Push the selec-tor lever to the -(DOWN) side to shiftback to 1st gear.

C090H01L-GAT

NOTE:o For smooth and safe operation, depress

the brake pedal when shifting from "Neu-tral" position or "Park" position to aforward or reverse gear.

o The ignition key must be in the "ON"position and the brake pedal fully de-pressed in order to move the shift leverfrom the "P" (Park) position to any of theother positions.

o It is always possible to shift from "R","N", "D" position to "P" position. Thevehicle must be fully stopped to avoidtransaxle damage.


11

C090N06O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never move the gear selector lever from "P"or "N" to any other position with the accelera-tor pedal depressed.

o Never move the gear selector lever into "P"when the vehicle is in motion.

o Be sure the car is completely stopped beforeyou attempt to shift into "R" or "D".

o Never take the car out of gear and coastdown a hill. This may be extremely hazard-ous. Always leave the car in gear whenmoving.

o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can causethem to overheat and malfunction. Instead,when you are driving down a long hill, slowdown and shift to a lower gear. When you dothis, engine braking will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.Otherwise, the lower gear may not be en-gaged.

o Always use the parking brake. Do not de-pend on placing the transaxle in "P" to keepthe car from moving.

o Exercise extreme caution when driving on aslippery surface. Be especially careful whenbraking, accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt change in ve-hicle speed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go out ofcontrol.

! WARNING:o Always buckle-up! In a collision, an

unbelted occupant is significantly morelikely to be seriously injured or killedthan a properly belted occupant.

o Avoid high speeds when cornering orturning.

o Do not make quick steering wheel move-ments, such as sharp lane changes orfast, sharp turns.

o The risk of rollover is greatly increased ifyou lose control of your vehicle at high-way speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadway andthe driver oversteers to reenter the road-way.

o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back into the travellanes.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.

o Optimum vehicle performance and economyis obtained by smoothly depressing andreleasing the accelerator pedal. WARNING:

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt torock the vehicle free by moving it forwardand backward. Do not attempt this proce-dure if people or objects are anywhere nearthe vehicle. During the rocking operationthe vehicle may suddenly move forward orbackward as it becomes unstuck, causinginjury or damage to nearby people or ob-jects.

!


12

!

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

C120A03A-AAT

(If installed)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designedto prevent wheel lock-up during sudden brakingor on hazardous road surfaces. The ABS con-trol module monitors the wheel speed and con-trols the pressure applied to each brake. Thus,in emergency situations or on slick roads, ABSwill increase vehicle control during braking.

NOTE:o A click sound may be heard in the engine

compartment when the vehicle beginsto move after the engine is started. Theseconditions are normal and indicate thatthe anti-lock brake system (ElectronicStability Program) is functioning prop-erly.

o During ABS operation, a slight pulsationmay be felt in the brake pedal when thebrakes are applied. Also, a noise may beheard in the engine compartment whilebraking. These conditions are normaland indicate that the anti-lock brakesystem is functioning properly.

WARNING:ABS will not prevent accidents due to im-proper or dangerous driving maneuvers.Even though vehicle control is improvedduring emergency braking, always main-tain a safe distance between you and ob-jects ahead. Vehicle speeds should alwaysbe reduced during extreme road condi-tions.The braking distance for cars equippedwith an anti-lock braking system may belonger than for those without it in thefollowing road conditions.During these conditions the vehicle shouldbe driven at reduced speeds.

o Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.o With tire chains installed.o Roads where the road surface is pitted or

has different surface height.

The safety features of an ABS equippedvehicle should not be tested by high speeddriving or cornering. This could endangerthe safety of yourself or others.

ELECTRONIC STABILITYCONTROL (ESC) SYSTEM

C310A04JM-AAT

(If installed)

! WARNING:Never drive too fast for the road conditionsor too quickly when cornering. Electronicstability control (ESC) will not prevent ac-cidents. Excessive speed in turns, abruptmaneuvers and hydroplaning on wet sur-faces can still result in serious accidents.Only a safe and attentive driver can preventaccidents by avoiding maneuvers thatcause the vehicle to lose traction. Even withESC installed, always follow all the normalprecautions for driving - including drivingat safe speeds for the conditions.


13

!OGK056303N

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) systemis designed to stabilize the vehicle during cor-nering manuevers. ESC checks where you aresteering and where the vehicle is actually going.ESC applies the brakes at individual wheels andintervenes in the engine management systemto stabilize the vehicle.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) systemis an electronic system designed to help thedriver maintain vehicle control under adverseconditions. It is not a substitute for safe drivingpractices.Factors including speed, road conditions anddriver steering input can all affect whether ESCwill be effective in preventing a loss of control.It is still your responsibility to drive and cornerat reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficientmargin of safety.

CAUTION:Driving with varying tire or wheel size maycause the ESC system to malfunction. Whenreplacing tires, make sure they are the samesize as your original tires.

!

WARNING:Electronic stability control is only a drivingaid; all normal precautions for driving ininclement weather and on slippery roadsurfaces should be observed.

C310B01JM-AAT

ESC ON/OFF Mode

When the ESC is operating, the ESC indicatorin the instrument cluster will blink.If you turn the system off by pressing the ESCswitch, the ESC-OFF indicator will come on andstay on. In the ESC-OFF mode, the stabilitycontrol will be deactivated. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. To turn the system back on, pressthe switch again. The ESC-OFF indicator shouldgo off.

NOTE:The ESC mode will automatically be turnedON after the engine is turned off and re-started.


14 GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES

!C130A02A-AAT

WARNING:o Whenever leaving vehicle or parking,

always set the parking brake as far aspossible and fully engage the vehicle'stransaxle into the park position. Ve-hicles not fully engaged in park with theparking brake set are at risk for movinginadvertently and injuring yourself orothers.

o All vehicles should always have the park-ing brake fully engaged when parking toavoid inadvertent movement of the carwhich can injure occupants or pedestri-ans.

o Nothing should be carried on top of theshelf panel behind the rear seat. If therewere an accident or a sudden stop, suchobjects could move forward and causedamage to the vehicle or injure the occu-pants.

o After being parked, check to be sure theparking brake is not engaged and that theparking brake indicator light is out beforedriving away.

o Driving through water may get the brakeswet. They can also get wet when the car iswashed. Wet brakes can be dangerous!Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakesare wet. Wet brakes cause the car to pull toone side. To dry the brakes, apply thebrakes lightly while driving slowly until thebraking action returns to normal, taking careto keep the car under control at all times. Ifthe braking action does not return to normal,stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call yourHyundai dealer for assistance.

o Don’t coast down hills with the car out of gear.This is extremely hazardous. Keep the carin gear at all times, use the brakes to slowdown, then shift to a lower gear so that enginebraking will help you maintain a safe speed.

o Don’t "ride" the brake pedal. Resting yourfoot on the brake pedal while driving can bedangerous because it can result in the brakesoverheating and losing their effectiveness. Italso increases the wear of the brake com-ponents.

o If a tire goes flat while you are driving, applythe brakes gently and keep the car pointedstraight ahead while you slow down. Whenyou are moving slowly enough for it to be safeto do so, pull off the road and stop in a safeplace.

C310D01JM-AAT

Indicators and Warning

The indicators should illuminate when the igni-tion key is turned to ON or START but shouldgo out after three seconds.If the indicators do not illuminate, or the ESC orESC-OFF indicator does not go out after 3seconds, have the vehicle checked by anauthorized dealer.

Should there be any unusual conditions in thedevice while driving, ESC-OFF indicator illumi-nates as a warning.If ESC-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your carto a safe place and stop the engine.Then, start the engine again to check if the ESC-OFF indicator goes out.

If the indicator remains lit even after the enginehas been started, have your car checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.


15DRIVING FOR ECONOMY

C140A02A-AAT

You can save fuel and get more miles from yourcar if you follow these suggestions:

o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderaterate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruisingspeed. Don't race between stoplights. Try toadjust your speed to that of the other trafficso you don't have to change speeds unnec-essarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-sible. Always maintain a safe distance fromother vehicles so you can avoid unneces-sary braking. This also reduces brake wear.

o Drive at a moderate speed. The faster youdrive, the more fuel your car uses. Driving ata moderate speed, especially on the high-way, is one of the most effective ways toreduce fuel consumption.

o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. Thiscan increase fuel consumption and alsoincrease wear on these components. Inaddition, driving with your foot resting on thebrake pedal may cause the brakes to over-heat, which reduces their effectiveness andmay lead to more serious consequences.

o Take care of your tires. Keep them inflatedto the recommended pressure. Incorrectinflation, either too much or too little, resultsin unnecessary tire wear. Check the tirepressures at least once a month.

o Be sure that the wheels are aligned cor-rectly. Improper alignment can result fromhitting curbs or driving too fast over irregularsurfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tirewear and may also result in other problemsas well as greater fuel consumption.

o Keep your car in good condition. For betterfuel economy and reduced maintenancecosts, maintain your car in accordance withthe maintenance schedule in Section 5. Ifyou drive your car in severe conditions,more frequent maintenance is required (seeSection 5 for details).

o Keep your car clean. For maximum service,your Hyundai should be kept clean and freeof corrosive materials. It is especially impor-tant that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed toaccumulate on the underside of the car. Thisextra weight can result in increased fuelconsumption and also contribute to corro-sion.

o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessaryweight in your car. Weight reduces fueleconomy.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than neces-sary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic),turn off your engine and restart only whenyou're ready to go.

o Remember, your Hyundai does not requireextended warm-up. After the engine hasstarted, allow the engine to run for 10 to 20seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear.In very cold weather, however, give yourengine a slightly longer warm-up period.

o If your car is equipped with an automatictransaxle, don’t let your car creep forward.To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot onthe brake pedal when the car is stopped.

o Use caution when parking on a hill. Firmlyengage the parking brake and place the gearselector lever in "P" (automatic transaxle) orin first or reverse gear (manual transaxle).If your car is facing downhill, turn the frontwheels into the curb to help keep the car fromrolling. If your car is facing uphill, turn the frontwheels away from the curb to help keep thecar from rolling. If there is no curb or if it isrequired by other conditions to keep the carfrom rolling, block the wheels.

o Under some conditions your parking brakecan freeze in the engaged position. This ismost likely to happen when there is anaccumulation of snow or ice around or nearthe rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. Ifthere is a risk that the parking brake mayfreeze, apply it only temporarily while you putthe gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) orin first or reverse gear (manual transaxle)and block the rear wheels so the car cannotroll. Then release the parking brake.

o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade withthe accelerator pedal. This can cause thetransmission to overheat. Always use thebrake pedal or parking brake.


16

o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Luggingis driving too slowly in too high a gear result-ing in the engine bucking. If this happens,shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racingthe engine beyond its safe limit. This can beavoided by shifting at the recommendedspeeds.

o Use your air conditioning sparingly. The airconditioning system is operated by enginepower so your fuel economy is reducedwhen you use it.

SMOOTH CORNERING

C150A01A-AAT

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners,especially when roads are wet. Ideally, cornersshould always be taken under gentle accelera-tion. If you follow these suggestions, tire wearwill be held to a minimum.

WINTER DRIVING

C160A01A-AAT

The more severe weather conditions of winterresult in greater wear and other problems. Tominimize the problems of winter driving, youshould follow these suggestions:

C160B01A-AAT

Snowy or Icy Conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may benecessary to use snow tires or to install tirechains on your tires. If snow tires are needed,it is necessary to select tires equivalent in sizeand type to the original equipment tires. Failureto do so may adversely affect the safety andhandling of your car. Speeding, rapid accelera-tion, sudden brake applications, and sharpturns are potentially very hazardous practices.During deceleration, use engine braking to thefullest extent. Sudden brake applications onsnowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur.You need to keep sufficient distance betweenthe vehicle in front and your vehicle. Also, applythe brake gently. It should be noted that installingtire chains on the tire will provide a greaterdriving force, but will not prevent side skids.

NOTE:Tire chains are not legal in all states. Checkstate laws before fitting tire chains.


17

C160H02A-AAT

Use Approved Window Washer Anti-Freeze in System

To keep the water in the window washer systemfrom freezing, add an approved window washeranti-freeze solution in accordance with instruc-tions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from Hyundai dealers andmost auto parts outlets. Do not use enginecoolant or other types of anti-freeze as thesemay damage the paint finish.

C160I01A-AAT

Don’t Let Your Parking Brake Freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake canfreeze in the engaged position. This is mostlikely to happen when there is an accumulationof snow or ice around or near the rear brakesor if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk theparking brake may freeze, apply it only tempo-rarily while you put the gear selector lever in "P"(automatic) or in first or reverse gear (manualtransaxle) and block the rear wheels so the carcannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

C160C01A-AAT

Use High Quality Ethylene Glycol Cool-ant

Your Hyundai is delivered with high qualityethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. Itis the only type of coolant that should be usedbecause it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-ing system, lubricates the water pump andprevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replen-ish your coolant in accordance with the main-tenance schedule in Section 5. Before winter,have your coolant tested to assure that itsfreezing point is sufficient for the temperaturesanticipated during the winter.

C160D01F-AAT

Check Battery and Cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the batterysystem. Visually inspect the battery and cablesas described in Section 6 (See page 6-19). Thelevel of charge in your battery can be checkedby your Hyundai dealer or a service station.

C160E01A-AAT

Change to "Winter Weight" Oil if Neces-sary

In some climates it is recommended that a lowerviscosity "winter weight" oil be used during coldweather. See Section 9 for recommendations.If you aren’t sure what weight oil you should use,consult your Hyundai dealer.

C160F01F-AAT

Check Spark Plugs and Ignition System

Inspect your spark plugs as described in Sec-tion 6 (See page 6-10) and replace them ifnecessary. Also check all ignition wiring andcomponents to be sure they are not cracked,worn or damaged in any way.

C160G01A-AAT

To Keep Locks from Freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt anapproved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the keyopening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it withan approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. Ifthe lock is frozen internally, you may be able tothaw it out by using a heated key. Handle theheated key with care to avoid injury.


18 HIGHER SPEED MOTORING

C160J01A-AAT

Don’t Let Ice and Snow AccumulateUnderneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can buildup under the fenders and interfere with thesteering. When driving in severe winter condi-tions where this may happen, you should peri-odically check underneath the car to be sure themovement of the front wheels and the steeringcomponents is not obstructed.

C160K01A-AAT

Carry Emergency Equipment

Depending on the severity of the weather whereyou drive your car, you should carry appropri-ate emergency equipment. Some of the itemsyou may want to carry include tire chains, towstraps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares,sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

C170A02A-AAT

Pre-Trip Inspections

1. Tires:Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specifica-tion. Low tire inflation pressures will result inoverheating and possible failure of the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tires which mayresult in reduced traction or tire failure.

NOTE:Never exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure shown on the tires.

2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:High speed travel consumes more fuel thanurban motoring. Do not forget to check bothengine coolant and engine oil.

3. Drive belt:A loose or damaged drive belt may result inoverheating of the engine.

! WARNING:o Underinflated or overinflated tires can

cause poor handling, loss of vehiclecontrol, and sudden tire failure leadingto accidents, injuries, and even death.Always check tires are properly inflatedbefore driving. Refer to pages 8-2~8-3for proper tire pressures and furtherinformation.

o Driving on tires with no or insufficienttread is dangerous. Worn-out tires canresult in loss of vehicle control, colli-sions, injury, and even death. Worn-outtires should be replaced as soon aspossible and should never be used fordriving. Always check tire tread beforedriving your car.


19

C190C03S-AAT

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or localregulations and that it is properly installed andoperating correctly.

NOTE:If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car willrequire more frequent maintenance due tothe additional load. See "Maintenance Un-der Severe Usage Conditions" on page 5-6.

TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING

C190A01S-AAT

If you are considering towing with your car, youshould first check with your State's Departmentof Motor Vehicles to determine their legal re-quirements.Since laws vary from State to State, the require-ments for towing trailers, cars, other types ofvehicles, or apparatus may differ. Ask yourHyundai dealer for further details before towing.

CAUTION:Do not do any towing with your car duringits first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in order toallow the engine to properly break in. Fail-ure to heed this caution may result in seri-ous engine or transaxle damage.

!

C190B01S-AAT

Trailer Hitches

Select the proper hitch and ball combination,making sure that its location is compatible withthat of the trailer or vehicle being towed. Use aquality non-equalizing hitch which distributesthe tongue load uniformly throughout the chas-sis.

The hitch should be bolted securely to the carand installed by a qualified technician. DO NOTUSE A HITCH DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARYINSTALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE THATATTACHES ONLY TO THE BUMPER.

C180A01A-AAT

Check your lights regularly for correct opera-tion and always keep them clean. When drivingduring the day in conditions of poor visibility, itis helpful to drive with headlights on low beam.This enables you to be seen, as well as to see.

USE OF LIGHTS


20

C190D01S-AAT

Safety Chains

Should the hitch connection between yourvechile and the trailer or vehicle you are towingfail, the trailer or vehicle could wander danger-ously across other lanes of traffic and ultimatelyleave the roadway. To eliminate this potentiallydangerous situation, safety chains, attachedbetween your car and the trailer or towedvehicle, are required in most states.

C190E02GK-AAT

Trailer Weight Limit

C190E01L

Tongue load Total trailer weight

Tongue loads can be increased or decreasedby redistributing the load in the trailer.This can be verified by checking the total weightof the loaded trailer and then checking the loadon the tongue.

NOTE:1. Never load the trailer with more weight in

the back than in the front. About 60% ofthe trailer load should be in the front halfon the trailer and the remaining 40% inthe rear.

2. The total gross vehicle weight with trailermust not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) shown on thevehicle identification plate (see page 8-1). The total gross vehicle weight is thecombined weight of the vehicle, driver,all passengers and their luggage, cargo,hitch, trailer tongue load and other op-tional equipment.

3. The front or rear axle weight must notexceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the vehicle identifi-cation plate (see page 8-2). It is possiblethat your towing package does not ex-ceed the GVWR but exceeds the GAWR.Improper trailer loading and/or too muchluggage in the trunk can overload therear axle. Redistribute the load and checkthe axle weight again.

C190E02L

Gross axle weight Gross vehicle weight

CAUTION:o Never connect a trailer brake system

directly to the vehicle brake system.o When towing a trailer on steep grades (in

excess of 6%) pay close attention to theengine coolant temperature gauge toensure the engine does not overheat. Ifthe needle of the coolant temperaturegauge moves across the dial towards"H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soon asit is safe to do so, and allow the engineto idle until it cools down. You mayproceed once the engine has cooledsufficiently.

!


21

(automatic). In addition, place wheel chocksat each of the trailer's tires.

9. If the trailer has electric brakes, start yourvehicle and trailer moving, and then apply thetrailer brake controller by hand to be sure thebrakes are working. This lets you checkyour electrical connection at the same time.

10.During your trip, occasionally check to besure that the load is secure, and that thelights and any trailer brakes are still working.

11.Avoid jerky starts, sudden acceleration orsudden stops.

12.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane changes.13.Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause the brakesto overheat, resulting in reduced brakingefficiency.

14.When going down a hill, shift into a lower gearand use the engine braking effect.When ascending a long grade, downshift thetransaxle to a lower gear and reduce speedto reduce chances of engine overloadingand/or overheating.

15.If you have to stop while going uphill, do nothold the vehicle in place by pressing on theaccelerator. This can cause the automatictransaxle to overheat. Use the parking brakeor footbrake.

NOTE:When towing check transaxle fluid morefrequently.

CAUTION:The following specifications are recom-mended when towing a trailer. The loadedtrailer weight cannot safely exceed the val-ues in the chart below.

!

! WARNING:o Improperly loading your vehicle and

trailer can seriously affect its steeringand braking performance causing acrash which could cause serious injuryor death.

o Towing a trailer affected vehicle han-dling and braking.

o Drive more slowly when towing a trailerand allow more distance when braking.

o Be careful when driving in slippery andwindy conditions.

o Be careful when turning and while driv-ing up and down hills.

Lbs. (kg)

Maximum Towable Weight

Trailer

1000 (453)

Tongue

100 (45)

C190F01S-AAT

Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips

1. Before towing, check hitch and safety chainconnections as well as proper operation ofthe trailer running lights, brake lights, andturn signals.

2. Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed. (Less than 60 mph)

3. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalconditions.

4. To maintain engine braking efficiency andelectrical charging performance, do not usefifth gear (manual transaxle) or overdrive(automatic transaxle).

5. Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

6. Check the condition and air pressure of alltires on the trailer and your car. Low tirepressure can seriously affect the handling.Also check the spare tire.

7. The vehicle/trailer combination is more af-fected by crosswind and buffeting.When being passed by a large vehicle, keepa constant speed and steer straight ahead.If there is too much wind buffeting, slow downto get out of the other vehicle's air turbulence.

8. When parking your car and trailer, especiallyon a hill, be sure to follow all the normalprecautions. Turn your front wheel into thecurb, set the parking brake firmly, and put thetransaxle in 1st or Reverse (manual) or Park


22

CAUTION:If overheating should occur when towing,(the temperature gauge reads near red zone),taking the following action may reduce oreliminate the problem.

1. Turn off the air conditioner.2. Reduce highway speed.3. Select a lower gear when going uphill.4. While in stop and go traffic, place the

gear selector in park or neutral and idlethe engine at a higher speed.

!

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

C190F01GK-AAT

Tire and Loading Information Label

The tire label located on the driver'sside of the center pillar outer panelgives the original tire size, cold tirepressures recommended for your ve-hicle, the number of people that can bein your vehicle and vehicle capacityweight.

I030A03GK1

Type A

I030A03GK2

Type B

I030A03GK3

Type C


23

Vehicle capacity weight:700 lbs (317 kg)Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-mum combined weight of occupantsand cargo. If your vehicle is equippedwith a trailer, the combined weight in-cludes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:Total: 4 persons

(Front seat: 2 persons, Rear seat: 2 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum num-ber of occupants including a driver,your vehicle may carry.However the seating capacity may bereduced based upon the weight of all ofthe occupants, and the weight of thecargo being carried or towed. Do notoverload the vehicle as there is a limitto the total weight, or load limit includingoccupants and cargo, the vehicle cancarry.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX pounds.

(4)The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs, andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

(5)Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.

(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Towing capacity:Towing capacity is the maximum trailerweight including its cargo weight, yourvehicle can tow. See the section "Traileror Vehicle Towing" for specificationsabout the trailer weight.

Cargo capacity:The cargo capacity of your vehicle willincrease or decrease depending on theweight and the number of occupantsand the tongue load, if your vehicle isequipped with a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit(1)Locate the statement "The combined

weight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kilograms or XXXpounds'' on your vehicle's placard.

(2)Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.


24

C190F03JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

860 lbs

(390 kg)

540 lbs

(245 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

172 lbs (68 kg) x 5

Available Cargo Weight

Example 3

A B C

C190F02JM

Example 2

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

750 lbs

(340 kg)

650 lbs

(295 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description



150 lbs (68 kg) x 5

Available Cargo and

Luggage Weight

A B C

C190F01JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

300 lbs

(136 kg)

1100 lbs

(498 kg)

Example 1

Item

A

B

C

Description



150 lbs (68 kg) × 2

Available Cargo and

Luggage weight

A B C


25

Refer to your vehicle's tire and loadinginformation label for specific informa-tion about your vehicle's capacity weightand seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers andcargo should never exceed yourvehicle's capacity weight.

!

This label also tells you the maximumweights that can be supported by thefront and rear axles, called Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh stationand weigh your vehicle. Your dealer canhelp you with this. Be sure to spread outyour load equally on both sides of thecenterline.

WARNING:o Never exceed the GVWR for your

vehicle, the GAWR for either thefront or rear axle and vehicle ca-pacity weight. Exceeding these rat-ings can cause an accident orvehicle damage. You can calcu-late the weight of your load byweighing the items (or people)before putting them in the vehicle.Be careful not to overload yourvehicle.

C190G03JM-AAT

Compliance Label

The compliance label is located on thedriver's side of the center piller outerpanel.

The label shows the maximum allow-able weight of the fully loaded vehicle.This is called the GVWR (Gross Ve-hicle Weight Rating). The GVWR in-cludes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel and cargo.

C190G01A


26

!NOTE:o Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Donot overload your vehicle.

o Using heavier suspension com-ponents to get added durabilitymight not change your weight rat-ings. Ask your dealer to help youload your vehicle the right way.

The label will help you decide how muchcargo and installed equipment yourvehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle –like suitcases, tools, packages, or any-thing else – they more as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash, the itemswill keep going and can cause an injuryif they strikes the driver or a passenger.

WARNING:o Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in yourvehicle's tires and possible tirefailure that could lead to a crash.

o Overloading your vehicle cancause increased stopping dis-tances that could lead to a crash.

o A crash resulting from poor han-dling vehicle damage, tire failure,or increased stopping distancescould result in serious injury ordeath.

! WARNING:o Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR, either themaximum front or rear GAWR andvehicle capacity weight. If you do,parts, including tires on your ve-hicle can break, and it can changethe way your vehicle handles andbraking ability. This could causeyou to lose control and crash.Also, overloading can shorten thelife of your vehicle.


27

!WARNING:

Items you carry inside your vehiclecan strike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

o Put things in the cargo area ofyour vehicle. Try to spread theweight evenly.

o Never stack items, like suitcases,inside the vehicle above the topsof the seats.

o Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

o When you carry something insidethe vehicle, secure it.

o Do not drive with a seat foldeddown unless necessary.

If the Engine will not Start .............................................. 3-2Jump Starting ................................................................ 3-3If the Engine Overheats ................................................ 3-4Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .................... 3-5Spare Tire ..................................................................... 3-9If You Have a Flat Tire ................................................ 3-11Changing a Flat Tire .................................................... 3-11If Your Vehicle Must be Towed ................................... 3-16Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-18If You Lose Your Keys ................................................ 3-18


33

32


IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

!D010A01A-AAT

D010B03A-AAT

If Engine Doesn’t Turn Over or TurnsOver Slowly

D010C02Y-AAT

If Engine Turns Over Normally but DoesNot Start

1. Check fuel level.2. With the key in the "OFF" position, check all

connectors at ignition, coils and spark plugs.Reconnect any that may be disconnected orloose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine compart-ment.

4. If the engine still does not to start, call aHyundai dealer or seek other qualified assis-tance.

D010D01A-AAT

If the Engine Stalls While Driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping astraight line. Move cautiously off the road toa safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle

will not start, contact a Hyundai dealer orseek other qualified assistance.

WARNING:If the engine will not start, do not push orpull the car to start it. This could result in acollision or cause other damage. In addi-tion, push or pull starting may cause thecatalytic converter to be overloaded andcreate a fire hazard.

1. If your car has an automatic transaxle, besure the gear selector lever is in "N" or "P"and the parking brake is set.

D010B01GK

F020100AUN

If the engine stalls at a crossroad orcrossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing,set the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position andthen push the vehicle to a safe place. If yourvehicle has a manual transaxle not equippedwith the ignition lock switch, the vehicle canmove forward by shifting to the 2(second) or3(third) gear and then turning the starter withoutdepressing the clutch pedal.

2. Check the battery connections to be surethey are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims orgoes out when you operate the starter, thebattery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to be surethey are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. Seeinstructions for "Jump Starting".

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

3JUMP STARTING

!o To jump start a car with a discharged battery,

follow this procedure exactly:

1. If the booster battery is installed in anothervehicle, be sure the two vehicles are nottouching.

2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and acces-sories in both vehicles.

3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable in theexact location shown on the previous page.First, attach one clamp of the jumper cableto the positive (+) post or cable of the dis-charged battery. Then attach the other endof the same cable to the positive (+) post orcable of the booster battery. Next, using theother cable, attach one clamp to the negative(-) post or cable of the booster battery. Thenattach the other end of that cable to a solidmetal part of the engine of the vehicle with thedischarged battery away from the battery.Do not connect the cable to any moving part.

4. Start the engine in the car with the boosterbattery and let it run for a few minutes. Thiswill help to assure that the booster battery isfully charged. During the jumping operation,run the engine in this vehicle at about 2,000rpm.

5. Start the engine in the car with the dis-charged battery using the normal startingprocedure. After the engine starts, leave thejumper cables connected and let the enginerun at fast idle or about 2000 rpm for severalminutes.

D020A03A-AAT

WARNING:The gas produced by the battery during thejump-start operation is highly explosive. Ifthese instructions are not followed exactly,serious personal injury and damage to thevehicle may occur! If you are not sure howto follow this procedure, seek qualifiedassistance. Automobile batteries containsulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highlycorrosive. When jump starting, wear pro-tective glasses and be careful not to getacid on yourself, your clothing or on the car.

o If you should accidentally get acid on yourskin or in your eyes, immediately removeany contaminated clothing and flush the areawith clear water for at least 15 minutes. Thenpromptly obtain medical attention. If youmust be transported to an emergency facil-ity, continue to apply water to the affectedarea with a sponge or cloth.

o The gas produced by the battery during thejump-start operation is highly explosive. Donot smoke or allow a spark or an open flamein the vicinity.

o The battery being used to provide the jumpstart must be 12-volt. If you cannot deter-mine that it is a 12-volt battery, do not attemptto use it for the jump start.

2.0L

HGK4001

HGK4002

Dis-chargedbattery

2.7L

Booster battery

Dis-chargedbattery

Booster battery

34


IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

!

! WARNING:While the engine is running, keep hair,hands, and clothing away from movingparts such as the fan and drive belts toprevent injury.

5. If the water pump drive belt is broken orengine coolant is leaking out, stop the engineimmediately and call the nearest Hyundaidealer for assistance.

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. This can allow coolant to beblown out of the opening and cause seri-ous burns.

D030A02A-AAT

If your temperature gauge indicates overheat-ing, you experience a loss of power, or hear loudpinging or knocking and the engine is probablytoo hot. If this happens and, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safeto do so.

2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" (auto-matic), or neutral (manual transaxle) and setthe parking brake. If the air conditioning is on,turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under the caror steam is coming out from the hood, stopthe engine. Do not open the hood until theengine coolant has stopped running or thesteaming has stopped. If there is no visibleloss of engine coolant and no steam, leavethe engine running and check to be sure theengine cooling fan is operating. If the fan isnot running, turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt ismissing. If it is not missing, check to see thatit is tight. If the drive belt seems to besatisfactory, check for engine coolant leak-ing from the radiator, hoses or under the car.(If the air conditioning had been in use, it isnormal for cold water to be draining from itwhen you stop).

6. Carefully remove the jumper cables in thereverse order of attachment.

If you do not know why your battery becamedischarged (because the lights were left on,etc.), have the charging system checked byyour Hyundai dealer.


5

!

6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheat-ing, wait until the engine temperature hasreturned to normal. Then, if the engine cool-ant has been lost, carefully add water to thereservoir (Page 6-8) to bring the fluid level inthe reservoir up to the halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for fur-ther signs of overheating. If overheatinghappens again, call a Hyundai dealer forassistance.

CAUTION:Serious loss of engine coolant indicatesthere is a leak in the cooling system and thisshould be checked as soon as possible bya Hyundai dealer.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

OGK036400N

C320A01JM-AAT

➀ Low Tire Pressure Telltale➁ TPMS Malfunction Indicator

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-vided), should be checked monthly whencold and inflated to the inflation pres-sure recommended by the vehicle manu-facturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehiclehas tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you should de-termine the proper tire inflation pres-sure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your ve-hicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressure tell-tale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accord-ingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, andinflate them to the proper pressure.Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle’s han-dling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance,and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the TPMS lowtire pressure telltale.

36


Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is not operat-ing properly. The TPMS malfunctionindicator is provided by a separate tell-tale, which displays the symbol "TPMS"when illuminated. When the malfunc-tion indicator is illuminated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-functions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternate tires or wheelson the vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Always checkthe TPMS malfunction telltale after re-placing one or more tires or wheels onyour vehicle to ensure that the replace-ment or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function prop-erly.

Low tire pressure telltale

When the tire pressure monitoring sys-tem warning telltale is illuminated, oneor more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.Immediately reduce your speed, avoidhard cornering and anticipate increasedstopping distances. You should stopand check your tires as soon as pos-sible. Inflate the tires to the properpressure as indicated on the vehicle’splacard or tire inflation pressure labellocated on the driver’s side center pillarouter panel. If you cannot reach a ser-vice station or if the tire cannot hold thenewly added air, replace the low pres-sure tire with the temporary spare tire.Then the TPMS malfunction indicatormay turn on and the Low Tire Pressuretelltale may turn off after restarting andabout 20 minutes of continuous drivingbefore you have the low-pressure tirerepaired and replaced on the vehicle.

CAUTION:In winter or cold weather, the low tirepressure telltale may be illuminatedif the tire pressure was adjusted tothe recommended tire inflation pres-sure in warm weather. It does notmean your TPMS is malfunctioningbecause the decreased temperatureleads to a proportional lowering oftire pressure.When you drive your vehicle from awarm area to a cold area or from acold area to a warm area, or theoutside temperature is greatly higheror lower, you should check the tireinflation pressure and adjust the tiresto the recommended tire inflationpressure.

!


7

! WARNING:Significantly low tire pressure makesthe vehicle unstable and can contrib-ute to loss of vehicle control andincreased braking distances.Continued driving on low pressuretires will cause the tires to overheatand fail.

TPMS (Tire pressure monitoringsystem) malfunction telltale

The TPMS malfunction indicator turnson and stays on when there is a problemwith the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-tem. If the system is able to correctlydetect an under-inflation warning at thesame time as system failure then it willilluminate both the TPMS malfunctionand the low tire pressure telltale e.g. ifFront Left sensor fails, the TPMS mal-function indicator turns, but if FrontRight, Rear Left, or Rear Right tire isunder-inflated, the low tire pressure tell-

tale may turn on at the same time as theTPMS malfunction indicator.Have the system checked by an autho-rized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-sible to determine the cause of theproblem.

NOTE:o The TPMS malfunction indicator

may be illuminated if the vehicleis operated in areas close to elec-tric power supply cables or radiotransmitters such as near policestations, government and publicoffices, broadcasting stations,military installations, airports, ortransmitting towers, etc. which caninterfere with normal operation ofthe Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-tem (TPMS).

o The TPMS malfunction indicatormay be illuminated if snow chainssome electronic devices, such asnotebook computers, are used inthe vehicle. This can interfere withnormal operation of the Tire Pres-sure Monitoring System (TPMS).

o If there is a failed tire sensor, it ispossible for the TPMS to tempo-rarily learn a replacement sensorif closely driven to another vehiclethat is also equipped with TPMS.In rare cases, this may tempo-rarily delay the TPMS malfunctionindicator from turning on.

Changing a tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the Low TirePressure telltale will turn on. Have theflat tire repaired by an authorized Hyundaidealer as soon as possible or replacethe flat tire with the temporary sparetire. NEVER use a puncture-repairingagent to repair and/or inflate a lowpressure tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside the tirebehind the valve stem. You must useTPMS specific wheels. It is recom-mended that you always have your tiresserviced by an authorized Hyundai dealeras soon as possible.

38


!

!After you replace the low pressure tirewith the spare tire, the TPMS malfunc-tion indicator or the Low Tire Pressuretelltale may illuminate after restartingand about 20 minutes of continuousdriving.Once the low pressure tire is re-inflatedto the recommended pressure and in-stalled on the vehicle, the TPMS mal-function indicator and the low tire pres-sure telltale will extinguish. If the lowpressure and TPMS malfunction indi-cators are not extinguished after about20 minutes of continuous driving, pleasevisit an authorized Hyundai dealer.You may not be able to identify a low tireby simply looking at it. Always use agood quality tire pressure gauge tomeasure the tire's inflation pressure.Please note that a tire that is hot (frombeing driven) will have a higher pres-sure measurement than a tire that iscold (from sitting stationary for at least3 hours and driven less than 1 mileduring that 3 hour period). Allow the tireto cool before measuring the inflationpressure.

Always be sure the tire is cold beforeinflating to the recommended pressure.A cold tire means the vehicle has beensitting for 3 hours and driven for lessthan 1 mile in that 3 hour period.

NOTE:o Do not use any tire sealant if your

vehicle is equipped with a TirePressure Monitoring System. Theliquid sealant can damage the tirepressure sensors.

o In order for the system to correctlymonitor tires for under-inflation,there should be a total of exactly 4sensors fitted to each of the fourdriven wheel positions. Thereshould be no other sensors in thevehicle include spare tire positionsince this could cause the systemto monitor the wrong sensors.

WARNING - TPMSo The TPMS cannot alert you to se-

vere and sudden tire damagecaused by external factors.

o If you feel any vehicle instability,immediately take your foot off theaccelerator and slowly move to asafe position off the road.

WARNING:Tampering with, modifying, or dis-abling the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) components mayinterfere with the system's ability towarn the driver of low tire pressureconditions and/or TPMS malfunc-tions. Tampering with, modifying,or disabling the Tire Pressure Moni-toring System (TPMS) componentsmay void the warranty for that por-tion of the vehicle.


9

!

SPARE TIRE

D040A03GK-AAT

Temporary Spare Tire

The following instructions for the tem-porary spare tire should be observed:

1. Check inflation pressure as soon aspractical after installing the sparetire, and adjust to the specified pres-sure. The tire pressure should beperiodically checked and maintainedat the specified pressure while thetire is stored.

Tire Size

Inflation Pressure

T125/70 R16

420 kPa(60 psi)

4. As the temporary spare tire is spe-cifically designed for your car, itshould not be used on any othervehicle.

5. The temporary spare tire should notbe used on any other wheels, norshould standard tires, snow tires,wheel covers or trim rings be usedwith the temporary spare wheel. Ifsuch use is attempted, damage tothese items or other car componentsmay occur.

6. The temporary spare tire pressureshould be checked once a monthwhile the tire is stored.

2. The spare tire should only be usedtemporarily and should be returnedto the luggage compartment as soonas the original tire can be repaired orreplaced.

3. Continuous use at speeds of over 50mph (80 km/h) is not recommended.

Spare Tire Pressure

CAUTION:o Do not use snow chains with your

temporary spare tire.o Do not use more than one tempo-

rary spare tire at a time.o Do not tow a trailer while the tem-

porary spare tire is installed.

!

This device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired op-eration.

WARNING:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment.

310


D040B01A-AAT

Handling the Spare Tire

Remove the installation bolt to removethe spare tire. To replace the spare tirein its storage compartment, tighten thebolt firmly with your fingers until there isno more play in the spare tire.

HGK4010A

! WARNING:The temporary spare tire is for emer-gency use only. Do not operate yourvehicle on this temporary spare atspeeds over 50 mph (80 kmh). Theoriginal tire should be repaired orreplaced as soon as is possible toavoid failure of the spare possiblyleading to personal injury or death.

Spare Tire Pressure

D040A01TG-AAT

Full Size Spare Tire (If Installed)

The following instructions for the FULLSIZE spare tire should be observed:

Check inflation pressure as soon aspractical after installing the spare tire,and adjust to the specified pressure.The tire pressure should be periodicallychecked and maintained at the speci-fied pressure while the tire is stored.

Tire SizeInflation Pressure

Full Size240 kPa (35 psi)


11CHANGING A FLAT TIREIF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

D060A02A-AAT

The procedure described on the follow-ing pages can be used to rotate tires aswell as to change a flat tire. Whenpreparing to change a flat tire, check tobe sure the gear selector lever is in "P"(automatic transaxle) or reverse gear(manual transaxle) and that the parkingbrake is set, then:

OGK036060

D050A01A-AAT

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal and let the car slow down whiledriving straight ahead. Do not applythe brakes immediately or attempt topull off the road as this may cause aloss of control. When the car hasslowed to such a speed that it is safeto do so, brake carefully and pull offthe road. Drive off the road as far aspossible and park on firm, levelground. If you are on a divided high-way, do not park in the median areabetween the two traffic lanes.

2. When the car is stopped, turn on youremergency hazard flashers, set theparking brake and put the transaxlein "P" (automatic) or reverse (manualtransaxle).

3. Have all passengers get out of the car.Be sure they all get out on the side ofthe car that is away from traffic.

4. Change the tire following the instruc-tions provided on the following pages.

D060B02GK-AAT

1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool

Remove the spare tire and remove thejack and tool bag from the trunk.

HGK4008

312


D060D02A-AAT

3. Loosen Wheel Nuts

The wheel nuts should be loosenedslightly before raising the car. To loosenthe nuts, turn the wrench handle coun-terclockwise. When doing this, be surethat the socket is seated completelyover the nut so it cannot slip off. Formaximum leverage, position the wrenchso the handle is to the left as shown inthe drawing. Then, while holding thewrench near the end of the handle, pushdown on it with steady pressure. Do notremove the nuts at this time. Justloosen them about one-half turn.

HGK4013

D060C01A-AAT

2. Block the Wheel

Block the wheel that is diagonally oppo-site from the flat to keep the vehiclefrom rolling when the car is raised on thejack.

HGK4011

Flat tire

The jack is located behind the right sideluggage trim. Remove the jack cover byunscrewing the bolts. Turn the jack endcounterclockwise to lower the jackheight by using a screw driver or wrenchbar and remove it from the bracket.

HGK4009


13

D060E01A-AAT

4. Put the Jack in Place

The base of the jack should be placedon firm, level ground. The jack shouldbe positioned as shown in the drawing.

OGK036401

!WARNING:

Do not get under the car when it issupported by the jack! This is verydangerous as the jack could fall andcause serious injury or death. Noone should stay in the car while thejack is being used.

D060F02E-AAT

5. Raising the Car

After inserting a bar into the wheel nutwrench, install the bar into the jack asshown in the drawing. To raise thevehicle, turn the jack handle clockwise.As the jack begins to raise the vehicle,double check that it is properly posi-tioned and will not slip. If the jack is onsoft ground or sand, place a board,brick, flat stone or other object underthe base of the jack to keep it fromsinking.

D060F01MC

Wrench bar

Wheel nutwrench

Raise the car high enough so that thefully inflated spare tire can be installed.To do this, you will need more groundclearance than is required to removethe flat tire.

314


D060H02Y-AAT

7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts

To reinstall the wheel, hold it on thestuds, put the wheel nuts on the studsand tighten them finger tight. The nutsshould be installed with their small di-

OGK036604

wheel nuts could come loose andcause the loss of a wheel. Loss of awheel may result in loss of control ofthe vehicle. This may cause seriousinjury or death.

!WARNING:

Wheels and wheel covers may havesharp edges. Handle them carefullyto avoid possible severe injury. Be-fore putting the wheel into place, besure that there is nothing on the hubor wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,etc.) that interferes with the wheelfrom fitting solidly against the hub. Ifthere is, remove it. If there is notgood contact on the mounting sur-face between the wheel and hub, the

OGK036603

D060G02Y-AAT

6. Changing Wheels

Loosen the wheel nuts and removethem with your fingers. Slide the wheeloff the studs and lay it flat so it cannotroll away. To put the wheel on the hub,pick up the spare tire, line up the holeswith the studs and slide the wheel ontothem. If this is difficult, tip the wheelslightly and get the top hole in the wheellined up with the top stud. Then jigglethe wheel back and forth until the wheelcan be slid over the other studs.

OGK036403


15

D060I01E-AAT

8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts

Lower the car to the ground by turningthe wheel nut wrench counterclock-wise. Then position the wrench as shownin the drawing and tighten the wheelnuts. Be sure the socket is seatedcompletely over the nut. Do not stand

HGK4014

ameter ends directed inward. Jiggle thetire to be sure it is completely seated,then tighten the nuts as much as pos-sible with your fingers again.

D060J01FC-GAT

After Changing Wheels

If you have a tire gauge, remove thevalve cap and check the air pressure. Ifthe pressure is lower than recom-mended, drive slowly to the nearestservice station and inflate to the correctpressure. If it is too high, adjust it untilit is correct. Always reinstall the valvecap after checking or adjusting tirepressure. If the cap is not replaced, airmay leak from the tire. If you lose avalve cap, buy another and install it assoon as possible.

OGK036605

on the wrench handle or use an exten-sion pipe over the wrench handle.Go around the wheel tightening everyother nut until they are all tight. Thendouble-check each nut for tightness.After changing wheels, have a techni-cian tighten the wheel nuts to theirproper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:65-80 lb.ft (900-1,100kg.cm)

316


D080B01O-GAT

Towing the Vehicle

HGK4030

Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lift typetruck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment (3).

1)

2)

3) dolly

IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BETOWED

D080A01O-GAT

If your vehicle has to be towed, it should be doneby your Hyundai dealer or a commercial towtruck service. This will help assure that yourvehicle is not damaged in towing. Also, profes-sionals are generally aware of local laws gov-erning towing. In any case, rather than riskdamage to your car, it is suggested that youshow this information to the tow truck operator.Be sure that a safety chain system is used andthat all local laws are observed.It is recommended that your vehicle be towedwith a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipmentwith all the wheels off the ground.

! CAUTION:o Your vehicle can be damaged if towed

incorrectly!o Be sure the transaxle is in neutral.o When the engine will not start, be sure

the steering is unlocked by placing thekey in the "ACC" position.

After you have changed wheels, al-ways secure the flat tire in its place inthe luggage compartment and returnthe jack and tools to their proper stor-age locations.


17

!

HGK4016

CAUTION:o When towing the vehicle, take care not to

cause damage to the bumper or under-body of the vehicle.

o Do not tow with sling type truck as thismay cause damage to the bumper orunderbody of the vehicle.

!

1) If the vehicle is being towed with the rearwheels on the ground, be sure the parkingbrake is released.

NOTE:Before towing, check the level of the auto-matic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT"range on the dipstick, add fluid. If youcannot add fluid, a towing dolly must beused.

2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspensioncomponents are damaged or the vehicle isbeing towed with the front wheels on theground, use a towing dolly under the frontwheels.

o Manual Transaxle:If you do not use a towing dolly, place theignition key in the "ACC" position and put thetransaxle in "N (Neutral)". HGK4017

CAUTION:

A vehicle with an automatic transaxle shouldnever be towed from the rear with the frontwheels on the ground. This can cause se-rious damage to the transaxle. Be sure touse a towing dolly under the front wheels.

CAUTION:Do not tow with the key removed or in the"LOCK" position when towing from therear without a towing dolly.

!

o Automatic Transaxle:Be sure to use a towing dolly under the frontwheels.

3) It is recommended that your vehicle betowed with all the wheels off the ground.

318


IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS

D120A01A-AAT

If you lose your keys, many Hyundai dealerscan make you a new key if you have your keynumber.If you lock the keys inside your car and youcannot obtain a new key, many Hyundai dealerscan use special tools to open the door for you.

! CAUTION:o If the car is being towed with all four

wheels on the ground, it can be towedonly from the front. Be sure that thetransaxle is in neutral. Do not tow atspeeds greater than 30 mph (50 km/h)and for more than 15 miles (25 km).

o Be sure the steering is unlocked by plac-ing the key in the "ACC" position. Adriver must be in the towed vehicle tooperate the steering and brakes.

EMERGENCY TOWING

D080D02A-AAT For emergency towing when no commercialtow vehicle is available, attach a tow cable,chain or strap to one of the towing hooks underthe front /rear of your car. Do not attempt to towyour vehicle in this manner on any unpavedsurface. This could result in serious damage toyour car.Nor should towing be attempted if the wheels,drive train, axles, steering or brakes are dam-aged. Before towing, be sure the transaxle is inneutral and the key is in "ACC" (with the engineoff) or in the "ON" position (with the enginerunning). A driver must be in the towed car tosteer it and operate the brakes.

OGK066005

Front

OGK066006

Rear

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

4Corrosion Protection ..................................................... 4-2To Help Prevent Corrosion ........................................... 4-2Washing and Waxing .................................................... 4-3Cleaning the Interior ...................................................... 4-5

4

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

2 CORROSION PROTECTION

E020B01A-AAT

Keep Your Car Clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keepyour car clean and free of corrosive materials.Attention to the underside of the car is particu-larly important.

o If you live in a high-corrosion area — whereroad salts are used, near the ocean, areaswith industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, youshould take extra care to prevent corrosion.In winter, hose off the underside of your carat least once a month and be sure to cleanthe underside thoroughly when winter isover.

o When cleaning underneath the car, giveparticular attention to the components underthe fenders and other areas that are hiddenfrom view. Do a thorough job; just dampeningthe accumulated mud rather than washing itaway will accelerate corrosion rather thanprevent it. Water under high pressure andsteam are particularly effective in removingaccumulated mud and corrosive materials.

E020A01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion from gettingstarted by observing the following:

E010D01A-AAT

Moisture Breeds Corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corro-sion is most likely to occur. For example, cor-rosion is accelerated by high humidity, particu-larly when temperatures are just above freez-ing. In such conditions, the corrosive material iskept in contact with the car surfaces by mois-ture that is slow to evaporate.Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slowto dry and holds moisture in contact with thevehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, itcan still retain the moisture and promote corro-sion.High temperatures can also accelerate corro-sion of parts that are not properly ventilated sothe moisture can be dispersed. For all thesereasons, it is particularly important to keep yourcar clean and free of mud or accumulations ofother materials. This applies not only to thevisible surfaces but particularly to the undersideof the car.

E010C01A-AAT

High-Corrosion Areas

If you live in an area where your car is regularlyexposed to corrosive materials, corrosion pro-tection is particularly important. Some of thecommon causes of accelerated corrosion areroad salts, dust control chemicals, ocean airand industrial pollution.

E010B01A-AAT

Common Causes of Corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on yourcar are:

o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed toaccumulate underneath the car.

o Removal of paint or protective coatings bystones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapesand dents which leave unprotected metalexposed to corrosion.

E010A01A-AAT

Protecting Your Hyundai fromCorrosion

By using the most advanced design and con-struction practices to combat corrosion,Hyundai produces cars of the highest quality,However, this is only part of the job. To achievethe long-term corrosion resistance yourHyundai can deliver, the owner’s cooperationand assistance is also required.

TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

3WASHING AND WAXING

E020E01A-AAT

Don’t Neglect the Interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats andcarpeting to cause corrosion. Check under themats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, clean-ing materials or chemicals in the car.These should be carried only in proper contain-ers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up,flushed with clear water and thoroughly dried.

E020C01A-AAT

Keep Your Garage Dry

Don’t park your car in a damp, poorly ventilatedgarage. This creates a favorable environmentfor corrosion. This is particularly true if youwash your car in the garage or drive it into thegarage when it is still wet or covered with snow,ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contrib-ute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated somoisture is dispersed.

E030A02GK-AAT

Washing Your Hyundai

Never wash your car when the surface is hotfrom being in the sun. Always wash your car inthe shade.

Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasive andcan scratch the paint if it is not removed. Airpollution or acid rain may damage the paint andtrim through chemical action if pollutants areallowed to remain in contact with the surface. Ifyou live near the ocean or in an area where roadsalts or dust control chemicals are used, youshould pay particular attention to the undersideof the car. Start by rinsing the car to remove dustand loose dirt. In winter, or if you have driventhrough mud or muddy water, be sure to thor-oughly clean the underside as well. Use a harddirect stream of water to remove accumulationsof mud or corrosive materials. High pressurecar washes may cause water to enter yourvehicle. Use a good quality car-washing solu-tion and follow the manufacturer's directions onthe package. These are available at yourHyundai dealer or auto parts outlet. Don't usestrong household detergents, gasoline, strongsolvents or abrasive cleaning powders as thesemay damage the finish.Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it frequentlyand don't damage the finish by rubbing too hard.For stubborn spots, dampen them frequentlyand remove them a little at a time.

o When cleaning lower door panels, rockerpanels and frame members, be sure thatdrain holes are kept open so that moisturecan escape and not be trapped inside to ac-celerate corrosion.

E020D02A-AAT

Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should becovered with "touch-up" paint as soon as pos-sible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. Ifbare metal is showing through, the attention ofa qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly cor-rosive and may damage painted surfaces in justa few hours. Always remove bird droppings assoon as possible.


4

If you find any nicks or scratches in the paint,use touch-up paint to cover them to preventcorrosion. To protect the paintwork of the caragainst corrosion, you must clean your Hyundai(at least once a month). Give special attentionto the removal of salt, mud and other sub-stances on the underside of the splashboardsof the car. Make sure that the outlets and theunderside of the doors are open. Paint damagecan be caused by small accumulation of tar,industrial precipitation, tree resin, insects andbird droppings, when not removed immediately.If water alone is not strong enough to remove theaccumulated dirt, use a mild car washing solu-tion. Be sure to rinse the surface after washingto remove the solution. Never allow the solutionto dry on the painted surfaces.

To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush orsoapy steel-wool scouring pad.To clean plastic wheel covers, use a cleansponge or soft cloth and water.

To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, use a mildsoap or neutral detergent. Do not use abrasivecleaners. Protect the bare-metal surfaces bycleaning, polishing and waxing. Because alumi-num is subject to corrosion, be sure to givealuminum alloy wheels special attention in win-ter. If you drive on salted roads, clean thewheels thoroughly afterwards.

After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly. Ifsoapy water dries on the finish, streaking willresult.

When the weather is warm and the humidity low,you may find it necessary to rinse each sectionimmediately after washing to avoid streaking.

After rinsing, dry the car using a damp chamoisor soft, absorbent cloth. The reason for dryingthe car is to remove water from the car so it willdry without water spots. Don't rub, this candamage the finish.

CAUTION:!

o Water washing in the engine compart-ment including high pressure waterwashing may cause the failure of electri-cal circuits located in the engine com-partment.

o Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electrical/electroniccomponents inside the vehicle as thismay damage them.

OJB037800

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

5CLEANING THE INTERIOR

E040A01A-AAT

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery

To clean the vinyl upholstery, first remove loosedirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner. Then applya solution of mild soap or detergent and waterusing a clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this tostay on the surface to loosen the dirt, then wipewith a clean damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirtstains are not removed, repeat this procedureuntil the upholstery is clean. Do not use gaso-line, solvent, paint thinner or other strong clean-ers.

E030E01A-AAT

Maintaining Bumpers

Special precautions must be observed to pre-serve the appearance of the bumpers on yourHyundai. They are:

o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyte orhydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers. If youdo, wash it off immediately with clear water.

o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper sur-faces. They are made of soft plastic and thesurface can be damaged if mistreated. Donot use abrasive cleaners. Use warm waterand mild soap or car-washing solution.

o Do not expose the bumpers to high tem-peratures. For example, if you have your carrepainted, do not leave the bumpers on thecar if the car is going to be placed in a high-temperature paint booth.

E030D01A-AAT

When to Wax Again

You should polish and wax the car again whenwater no longer beads on a clean surface butspreads out over a larger area.

E030C01A-AAT

Polishing and Waxing

Always wash and dry the car before polishingor waxing or using a combination cleaner andwax. Use a good quality commercial productand follow the manufacturer’s directions on thecontainer. Polish and wax the bright trim piecesas well as the paint.

E030B01A-AAT

Spot Cleaning

Don’t use gasoline, strong solvents or corro-sive cleaning agents. These can damage thefinish of the car. To remove road tar, useturpentine on a clean, soft cloth or commerciallyavailable bug and tar remover. Be gentle.To remove dead insects or tree sap, use warmwater and mild soap or car-washing solution.Soak the spot and rub gently. If the paint has lostits luster, use a commercial car-cleaning polish.


6 ANY QUESTIONS?

E040D01A-AAT

Cleaning the Seat Belts

To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or spongewith mild soap or detergent and warm water. Donot use strong detergents, dye, bleach or abra-sive materials on the seat belts as this mayweaken the fabric.While cleaning the belts, inspect them for ex-cessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signs ofdamage and replace them if necessary.

E040C01A-AAT

Cleaning the Carpets

Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleaners ofthis type are available in aerosol cans in liquidform or powder. Read the instructions andfollow them exactly. Using a vacuum cleanerwith the appropriate attachment, remove asmuch dirt from the carpets as possible. Applythe foam following the manufacturer’s direc-tions, then rub in overlapping circles. Do not addwater. These cleaners work best when thecarpet is kept as dry as possible.

E050A01A-AAT

If you have any questions about the care of yourcar, consult your Hyundai dealer.

E040E01A-AAT

Cleaning the Windows

You may use any household window cleaner onthe windows. However, when cleaning the in-side of the rear window be careful not to damagethe rear window defroster wiring.

E040B01A-AAT

To Clean the Leather Upholstery(If Installed)

In the normal course of use, leather upholsteredsurfaces will, like any material, pick-up dust anddirt. This dust and dirt must be cleanedoff or it may work into the surface of the leather,causing damage.

Fine leather needs care, and should be cleanedwhen necessary. Washing leather thoroughlywith soap and water will keep your leatherlustrous, beautiful and ensure you have manyyears of wear.Take a piece of cheese cloth and using any mildsoap and lukewarm water, work up a goodlather. Thoroughly wash the leather. Wipe cleanwith a slightly damp cloth and dry with soft cloth.Do this as often as the leather becomes soiled.

During tanning operations, sufficient oils areincorporated through processing that none needbe applied during the life of the leather. Oilapplied to the finished surface will in no way helpthe leather and may do more harm than good.Varnishes and furniture polishes should neverbe used under any conditions.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5Maintenance Intervals ................................................... 5-2Scheduled Maintenance ................................................ 5-4Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............. 5-6Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-7California Perchlorate Notice ...................................... 5-10

5

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

2

F010D01A-AAT

General Checks

These are the regular checks you should per-form when you drive your Hyundai or you fill thefuel tank. A list of these items will be found onpage 6-4.

F010C01A-AAT

Specified Scheduled Procedures

These are the procedures such as inspections,adjustments and replacements that are listed inthe maintenance charts starting on page 5-4.These procedures must be performed at theintervals shown in the maintenance schedule toassure that your warranty remains in effect.Although it is strongly recommended that theybe performed by the trained technicians at yourHyundai dealer, these procedures may be per-formed at any qualified service facility.It is suggested that genuine Hyundai serviceparts be used for any required repairs or re-placements. Other parts of equivalent qualitysuch as engine oil, engine coolant, manual orauto transaxle oil, brake fluid and so on whichare not supplied by Hyundai Motor Company orits distributor may be used without affectingyour warranty coverage but you should alwaysbe sure these are equivalent to the quality of theoriginal Hyundai parts. Your Owner's Hand-book provides further information about yourwarranty coverage.

F010A01A-AAT

Service Requirements

To ensure that you receive the greatest numberof miles of satisfying operation from your Hyundai,certain maintenance procedures must be per-formed. Although careful design and engineer-ing have reduced these to a minimum, those thatare required are of the utmost importance.It is your responsibility to have these mainte-nance procedures performed to comply withthe terms of the warranties covering your newHyundai. The Owner's Handbook supplied withyour new vehicle provides further informationabout these warranties.

F010B01A-AAT

Maintenance Requirements

The maintenance required for your Hyundaican be divided into three main areas:

o Specified scheduled procedureso General checkso Do-it-yourself maintenance

F010E01A-AAT

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

If you are mechanically inclined, own a few toolsthat are required and want to take the time to doso, you can inspect and service a number ofitems. For more information about doing it your-self, see Section 6.

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

3SCHEDULED MAINTENANCEREQUIREMENTS

F020A02S-AAT

o Inspection should be performed any time amalfunction is experienced or suspected.

o Receipts for all emission control systemservices should be retained to demonstratecompliance with conditions of the emissionssystem warranty.

o After 120 months or 150,000 miles (240,000km), continue to follow the prescribed main-tenance intervals.

o For severe usage maintenance require-ments, see page 5-6 of this section.

F010F01A-AAT

A Few Tips

o Whenever you have your Hyundai serviced,keep copies of the service records in yourglovebox. This will help ensure that you candocument that the required procedures havebeen performed to keep your warranties ineffect. This is especially important whenservice is not performed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

o If you choose to do your own maintenanceand repairs, you may find it helpful to havean official Hyundai Shop Manual. A copy ofthis publication may be purchased at yourHyundai dealer's parts department.


4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

F030B04GK-AAT

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.

DESCRIPTION

EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

FUEL FILTER

FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS

CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSES

VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS (PLATINUM COATED)

SPARK PLUGS (IRIDIUM COATED)

VALVE CLEARANCE (2.0 L)

FUEL TANK AIRFILTER

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

R

I

15

24

12

R

I

I

22.5

36

18

R

I

30

48

24

R

I

I

R

R

37.5

60

30

R

R

I

45

72

36

R

I

I

52.5

84

42

R

I

I

60

96

48

R

I

I

R

R

I

R

67.5

108

54

R

I

75

120

60

R

R

I

I

82.5

132

66

R

I

90

144

72

R

I

I

R

R

97.5

156

78

R

I

R

105

168

84

R

I

I

I

112.5

180

90

R

R

I

120

192

96

R

I

I

R

R

I

R

127.5

204

102

R

I

135

216

108

R

I

I

142.5

228

114

R

I

150

240

120

R

R

I

I

R

R

F030A01A-AAT

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission servicesto protect your emission warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.


5

Note :*1 - FOR THE FIRST TIME, REPLACE THE COOLANT AT 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR 60 MONTHS

AFTER THAT, REPLACE EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000KM) OR 24 MONTHS*2 - FOR EVERY 12 MONTHS OR 10,000 MILES (15,000 KM), WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST : "R"

F030C02GK-AAT

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

DESCRIPTION

GENERAL ITEMS

DRIVE BELT (WATER PUMP, GENERATOR AND A/CON)

COOLANT

TIMING BELT

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

BRAKE FLUID & CLUTCH FLUID

BRAKE HOSES AND LINES

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/LOWER ARM

BALL JOINT

POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES

DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS

AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR BLOWER UNIT)

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

I

I

15

24

12

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

22.5

36

18

I

I

30

48

24

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

37.5

60

30

I

I

45

72

36

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

52.5

84

42

I

I

60

96

48

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

67.5

108

54

I

I

75

120

60

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

82.5

132

66

I

I

90

144

72

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

97.5

156

78

I

I

105

168

84

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

112.5

180

90

I

I

120

192

96

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

127.5

204

102

I

I

135

216

108

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

142.5

228

114

I

I

150

240

120

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

See Note *2

See Note *1


6 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

F040A04GK-AAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriatemaintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

TIMING BELT

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS/PADS,

PARKING BRAKE

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/

LOWER ARM BALL JOINT

DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR BLOWER UNIT)

MAINTENANCE ITEM

R

R

R

R

I

I

I

I

R

R

R

EVERY 3,000 MILES (4,800 KM) OR 3 MONTHS


MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY


EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM)

EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)

MORE FREQUENTLY

DRIVINGCONDITION

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

MAINTENANCEOPERATION

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K

B, C, D, E, F, G

C, E

B, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G

C, D, E, F, G

A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

A, C, E, F, G, H, I

C, E

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatly driving short distance of less than 5miles(8km) in normal temperature or less than 10miles(16km) in freezing temperature

B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distancesC - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roadsD - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold

weather

E - Driving in sandy areasF - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F(32°C)G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roadH - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rackI - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towingJ - Driving over 100 MPH(170 Km/h)K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions


7

F060D01A-AAT

o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses andConnections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connec-tions for leakage and damage. Have a trainedtechnician replace any damaged or leakingparts immediately.

F060M01A-AAT

o Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenance sched-ule. If the car is being driven in severe condi-tions, more frequent oil and filter changes arerequired.

F060C01A-AAT

o Fuel Filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at which thevehicle may be driven, damage the emissionsystem and cause hard starting. If an exces-sive amount of foreign matter accumulates inthe fuel tank, the filter may require replacementmore frequently.After installing a new filter, run the engine forseveral minutes, and check for leaks at theconnections. Fuel filters should be installed bytrained technicians.

F060F02A-AAT

o Crankcase Ventilation Hoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence ofheat and/or mechanical damage. Hard andbrittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions,and excessive swelling indicate deterioration.Particular attention should be paid to examinethose hose surfaces nearest to high heatsources, such as the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assure that thehoses do not come in contact with any heatsource, sharp edges or moving componentwhich might cause heat damage or mechanicalwear. Inspect all hose connections, such asclamps and couplings, to make sure they aresecure, and that no leaks are present. Hosesshould be replaced immediately if there is anyevidence of deterioration or damage.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

F060H01A-AAT

o Air cleaner filter

A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is recom-mended when the filter is replaced.

F060G01A-AAT

o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should beinspected at those intervals specified in themaintenance schedule. Make sure that a newvapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly re-placed.

F060J01A-AAT

o Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of thecorrect heat range.

F060N02E-AAT

o Valve Clearance (2.0L)

Inspect excessive valve noise and/or enginevibration and adjust if necessary. A qualifiedtechnician should perform the operation.


8

F060B02A-AAT

o Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation andreplace if necessary. Drive belts should bechecked periodically for proper tension andadjusted as necessary.

F070C01A-AAT

o Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervalsspecified in the maintenance schedule.

F060E01A-AAT

o Timing belt

Inspect all parts related to the timing belt fordamage and deformation. Replace any dam-aged parts immediately.

F070D01A-AAT

o Manual transaxle oil

Inspect the manual transaxle oil according tothe maintenance schedule.

NOTE:If the oil level is low, check for possible leaksbefore adding oil. Do not overfill.

F070G03A-AAT

o Brake Fluid & Clutch Fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reser-voir. The level should be between "MIN" and"MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Useonly hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3or DOT 4.

F070H01A-AAT

o Rear Brake Drums and Linings/Parking Brake

Check the rear brake drums and linings forscoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts,and excessive wear. Inspect the parking brakesystem including the parking brake lever andcables. For detailed service procedures, referto the Shop Manual.

F070F01A-AAT

o Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing,cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replaceany deteriorated or damaged parts immedi-ately.

F070E06A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid

The fluid level should be in the “HOT” range ofthe dipstick, after the engine and transaxle areat normal operating temperature. Check theautomatic transaxle fluid level with the enginerunning and the transaxle in neutral, with theparking brake properly applied. Use HYUNDAIGENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SKATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP IIIspecification approved by Hyundai Motor Co.when adding or changing fluid. Using the wrongATF may result in damage to the ATM.


9

F070J01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs forrun out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

F070K01A-AAT

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler andhangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage.Start the engine and listen carefully for anyexhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections orreplace parts as necessary.

F070L01A-AAT

o Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections for loose-ness or damage. Retighten to the specifiedtorque.

F070M01A-AAT

o Steering gear box, linkage &boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, checkfor excessive free-play in the steering wheel.Check the linkage for bends or damage. Checkthe dust boots and ball joints for deterioration,cracks, or damage. Replace any damagedparts.

F070N01A-AAT

o Power Steering Pump, Belt and Hoses

Check the power steering pump and hoses forleakage and damage. Replace any damaged orleaking parts immediately. Inspect the powersteering belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, ex-cessive wear, oiliness and proper tension.Replace or adjust it if necessary.

F070P01A-AAT

o Drive Shafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps forcracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace anydamaged parts and, if necessary, repack thegrease.

F070Q01A-AAT

o Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and connec-tions for leakage and damage. Check air con-ditioning performance according to the relevantshop manual if necessary.


10 CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE

F080A01NF-AAT

Perchlorate Material-special handling may ap-ply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:Perchlorate containing materials, such as airbaginflators, seatbelt pretensioners and keylessremote entry batteries, must be disposed ofaccording to Title 22 California Code of Regu-lations Section 67384.10 (a).

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

6Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2General Checks ............................................................ 6-4Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-5Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-7Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ..................................... 6-9Windshield Wiper Blades .............................................. 6-9Checking the Transaxle Oil (manual) ......................... 6-11Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................. 6-12Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-14Checking the Clutch Fluid ........................................... 6-15Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-16Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-18Checking the Battery .................................................. 6-19Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-22Headlight Aiming Adjustment ...................................... 6-23Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-24Bulb Wattage............................................................... 6-33Fuse Panel Description ............................................... 6-34

6

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2 ENGINE COMPARTMENT

G010B01GK-GAT

(2.0 DOHC CVVT)

HGK5002

1. Engine oil filler cap2. Brake booster3. Brake fluid reservoir4. Clutch fluid reservoir (If installed)

5. Relay box6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap7. Power steering fluid reservoir8. Engine coolant reservoir9. Engine oil level dipstick

10. Radiator cap11. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick

(If installed)12. Air cleaner13. Battery

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing the engine,you should handle tools and other heavyobjects carefully so that the plastic rockercover of the engine is not damaged.

!

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

3

G010C01GK-GAT

(2.7 V6)

HGK5001

1. Power steering fluid reservoir2. Brake booster3. Brake fluid reservoir4. Air Cleaner

5. Relay box6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap7. Engine coolant reservoir8. Engine oil level dipstick9. Radiator cap

10. Engine oil filler cap11. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick

(If installed)12. Battery

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing the engine,you should handle tools and other heavyobjects carefully so that the plastic rockercover of the engine is not damaged.

!


4 GENERAL CHECKS

G020C01A-AAT

Vehicle Interior

The following should be checked each timewhen the vehicle is driven:

o Lights operationo Windshield wiper operationo Horn operationo Defroster, heating system operation (and air

conditioning, if installed)o Steering operation and conditiono Mirror condition and operationo Turn signal operationo Accelerator pedal operationo Brake operation, including parking brakeo Manual transaxle operation, including clutch

operationo Automatic transaxle operation, including

"Park" mechanism operationo Seat control condition and operationo Seat belt condition and operationo Sunvisor operation

If you notice anything that does not operatecorrectly or appears to be functioning incor-rectly, inspect it carefully and seek assistancefrom your Hyundai dealer if service is needed.

G020B01A-AAT

Vehicle Exterior

The following should be checked monthly:

o Overall appearance and conditiono Wheel condition and wheel nut torqueo Exhaust system conditiono Light condition and operationo Windshield glass conditiono Wiper blade conditiono Paint condition and body corrosiono Fluid leakso Door and hood lock conditiono Tire pressure and condition (including spare

tire)

G020A01A-AAT

Engine Compartment

The following should be checked regularly:

o Engine oil level and conditiono Transaxle fluid level and conditiono Brake fluid levelo Clutch fluid levelo Engine coolant levelo Windshield washer fluid levelo Accessory drive belt conditiono Engine coolant hose conditiono Fluid leaks (on or below components)o Power steering fluid levelo Battery conditiono Air filter condition


5

!

G030C02A-AAT

To Check the Oil Level

HGK5004

2.0L 2.7L

Before checking the oil, warm up the engine tothe normal operating temperature and be sureyour car is parked on level ground. Turn theengine off.Wait 5 minutes, then remove the dipstick, wipeit off, fully reinsert the dipstick and withdraw itagain. Then note the highest level the oil hasreached on the dipstick. It should be betweenthe upper ("F") and lower ("L") range.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL

G030A01A-AAT

Engine oil is essential to the performance andservice of the engine. It is suggested that youcheck the oil level at least once a week in normaluse and more often if you are on a trip or drivingin severe conditions.

G030B01O-AAT

Recommended Oil

The engine oil quality should meet the followingclassification.

API SJ, SL or ABOVE,ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

G030B01JM-U

NOTE:o For good fuel economy, SAE 5W-20 (5W-

30), ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is preferredregardless of regional option and en-gine variation.

o If SAE 5W-20 (5W-30), ILSAC GF-3 en-gine oil is not available, secondary rec-ommended engine oil for correspond-ing temperature range can be used.

WARNING:Be very careful not to touch the radiatorhose when adding the engine oil as it maybe hot enough to burn you.


6

If the oil level is close to or below the "L" mark,add oil until it reaches the "F" mark. To add oil:

1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counter-clockwise.

2. Add oil, then check the level again. Do notoverfill.

3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise.

The distance between the "F" and "L" marks isequal to about 1 quart of oil.

G030D01A-AAT

Adding Oil

HGK5005

2.0L 2.7L! CAUTION:

Slowly pour the recommended oil by usinga funnel. Do not overfill so as not to damageengine.

! WARNING:Be very careful not to touch the radiatorhose when adding the engine oil as it maybe hot enough to burn you.

NOTE:o It is recommended that the engine oil

and filter should be changed by an au-thorized Hyundai dealer.

o Always dispose of used engine oil in anenvironmentally acceptable manner. Itis suggested that it be placed in a sealedcontainer and taken to a service stationfor reclaimation. Do not pour the oil onthe ground or put it into the householdtrash.

! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:This product contains a chemical known tothe State of California to cause cancer.Used engine oil may cause irritation orcancer of the skin if left in contact with theskin for prolonged periods of time. Usedengine oil contains chemicals that havecaused cancer in laboratory animals. Al-ways protect your skin by washing yourhands thoroughly with soap and warmwater as soon as possible after handlingused oil.


7CHECKING AND CHANGING THEENGINE COOLANT

!G050A01TG-AAT

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. When the engine is hot, theengine coolant is under pressure and mayerupt through the opening if the cap isremoved. You could be seriously burned ifyou do not observe this precaution. Do notremove the radiator cap until the radiator iscool to the touch.

NOTE:It is recommended that the engine coolantshould be changed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

G050C01A-AAT

To Check the Coolant Level

The coolant level can be seen on the side of theplastic coolant reservoir. The level of the cool-ant should be between the "L" and "F" lines onthe reservoir when the engine is cold. If the levelis below the "L" mark, add engine coolant tobring it up between "L" and "F". If the level is low,inspect for coolant leaks and recheck the fluidlevel frequently. If the level drops again, visityour Hyundai dealer for an inspection anddiagnosis of the reason.

HGK4006

G050B01A-AAT

Recommended Engine Coolant

Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolant in a50/50 mix with water. The engine coolant shouldbe compatible with aluminum engine parts.Additional corrosion inhibitors or additives shouldnot be used. The cooling system must bemaintained with the correct concentration andtype of engine coolant to prevent freezing andcorrosion. Never allow the concentration ofantifreeze to exceed the 60% level or go belowthe 35% level, or damage to the cooling systemmay result. For proper concentration whenadding or replacing the engine coolant, refer tothe following table.

Ambient

temperature

°F ( °G)

5 (-15)

-13 (-25)

-31 (-35)

-49 (-45)

65%

60%

50%

40%

35%

40%

50%

60%

WaterAntifreeze

solution

Engine Coolant concentration


8

G050D03A-AAT

To Change the Engine Coolant

The engine coolant should be changed at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5.

CAUTION:Engine coolant can damage the finish ofyour car. If you spill engine coolant on thecar, wash it off thoroughly with clean water.

1. Park the car on level ground, set the park-ing brake and remove the radiator cap whencool.

2. Be sure your drain receptacle is in place.Open the drain cock on the radiator. Allow allthe engine coolant to drain from the coolingsystem, then securely close the drain cock.

3. Check Section 9 for the capacity of thecooling system in your car. Then, followingthe manufacturer’s directions on the enginecoolant container, add the appropriate quan-tity of coolant to the radiator.

!

4. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise with-out pressing down on it, until it stops. Thisrelieves any pressure remaining in the cool-ing system. And remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turning counterclock-wise.Now fill the radiator with clean demineralizedor distilled water. Continue to add cleandemineralized or distilled water in small quan-tities until the fluid level stays up in theradiator neck.

G050D03E

5. Start the engine, top off the radiator withwater and then add coolant to the reservoiruntil the level is between "L" and "F".

6. Replace the radiator and reservoir caps andcheck to be sure the drain cocks are fullyclosed and not leaking.

G050D04E


9

! WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the coolant fan so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases, the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

CAUTION:o Engine coolant can damage the finish of

your car. If you spill engine coolant onthe car, wash it off thoroughly with cleanwater.

o The engine in your vehicle has alumi-num engine parts and must be protectedby an ethylene-glycol base coolant toprevent corrosion and freezing.Do not use hard water. Hard water cancause engine damage from corrosion,overheating or freezing.

!

CHANGING THE AIR CLEANERFILTER

G070A01E-AAT

To change the filter, unsnap the clips around thecover. When this is done, the cover can be liftedoff, the old filter removed and the new filter putin its place. Genuine Hyundai ReplacementParts are recommended.

CAUTION:o Operating your vehicle without a proper

air filter in place can result in excessiveengine wear.

o When removing the air cleaner filter, becareful that dust or dirt does not enterthe air intake. These may result in dam-age to the air cleaner filter.

HGK5010

!

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

G080A03A-AAT

The wiper blades should be carefully inspectedfrom time to time and cleaned to remove accu-mulations of road film or other debris. To cleanthe wiper blades and arms, use a clean spongeor cloth with a mild soap or detergent and water.If the wipers continue to streak or smear theglass, replace them with Genuine HyundaiReplacement Parts or their equivalent.

G080A02GK

! CAUTION:o Do not operate the wipers on dry glass.

This can result in more rapid wear of thewiper blades and may scratch the glass.

o Keep the blade rubber out of contactwith petroleum products such as engineoil, gasoline etc.


10

o When the wiper blades are frozen inwinter weather or the washer fluid reser-voir is empty, the wipers may not operatefor ten minutes.This isn't a mechanical trouble but thefunction protecting the wiper by operat-ing circuit breaker inside of the wipermotor.

G080B01GK-GAT

Replacing the Wiper Blades

To remove the wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper bladeassembly to expose the plastic locking clip.

1LDA5023 2. Compress the clip and slide the blade as-sembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.

1JBA7037

To install the wiper bladeInstall the blade assembly in the reverse orderof removal.

1JBA7038


11

!

G100A05GK-AAT

Transaxle lubricant in the manual transaxleshould be checked at those intervals specifiedin the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section5.

HGK5009

Filler plug

Drain plug

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE OIL(MANUAL)

CAUTION:o Radiator anti-freeze (engine coolant)

should not be used in the washer systembecause it will damage the car’s finish.

o The washer should not be operated ifthe washer reservoir is empty. This candamage the washer fluid pump.

o In areas where water freezes in winter,use windshield washer antifreeze.

!

FILLING THE WASHER RESERVOIR

G090A03A-AAT

The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to thewindshield washer system.A good quality washer fluid should be used to fillthe washer reservoir. The fluid level should bechecked more frequently during inclementweather or whenever the washer system is inmore frequent use.The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.2 U.S.quarts (3.0 Liters).

HGK5014

WARNING:o Windshield washer fluid agents contain

some amounts of alcohol and can beflammable under certain circumstances.Do not allow sparks or flame to contactthe washer fluid or the washer fluidreservoir. Damage to the vehicle or itsoccupants could occur.

o Windshield washer fluid is poisonous tohumans and animals. Do not drink wind-shield washer fluid. Serious injury ordeath could occur.


12

! WARNING:The transaxle fluid level should be checkedwhen the engine is at normal operatingtemperature. This means that the engine,radiator, exhaust system etc., are very hot.Exercise great care not to burn yourselfduring this procedure.

! WARNING:It is always better to check the transaxle oillevel when the engine is cool or cold. If theengine is hot, you should exercise greatcaution to avoid burning yourself on hotengine or exhaust parts.

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLEFLUID (AUTOMATIC)

G110A02E-AAT

Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxle shouldbe checked at those intervals specified in thevehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.

NOTE:Automatic transaxle fluid is basically redcolor. As driving distance increases, thefluid color turns darkish red gradually. It isa normal condition and you should notjudge the need to replace based upon thechanging color.You must replace the automatic transaxlefluid in accordance with intervals specifiedin the vehicle maintenance schedule insection 5.

NOTE:It is recommended that the manual transaxlefluid should be checked by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

CAUTION:Use of aftermarket ATF additives may causedamage to the automatic transaxle. Onlyuse HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIA-MOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or otherbrands meeting the SP III specification ap-proved by Hyundai Motor Co. If you arehaving your vehicle serviced at a facilityother than a Hyundai dealer, verify ATF isused for your vehicle.

!


13

3. Confirm if the fluid level is in the “HOT” rangeon the level gauge. If the fluid level is lower,add the specified fluid from the fill hole. If thefluid level is higher, drain the fluid from thedrain hole.

4. If the fluid level is checked in coldcondition[fluid temperature 20~30°C(68~86°F)], add the fluid to the “COLD” lineand then recheck the fluid level according tothe above step 2.

G110D01GK-AAT

Checking the automatic transaxle fluidlevel

The automatic transaxle fluid level should bechecked regularly.

Keep the vehicle on level ground with the park-ing brake applied and check the fluid levelaccording to the following procedure.

1. Place the shift lever in N(neutral) positionand confirm the engine is running at idlespeed.

2. After the transaxle is warmed up sufficiently[fluid temperature 70~80°C (158~176°F)],for example by 10 minutes usual driving,move the shift lever through all positions thenplace the shift lever in N(neutral) or P(park)position.

HGK5007

2.0L 2.7L

!

HGK5008

Fluid level should be within this range

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the cooling fan, so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases, the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.


14

G120D01A-AAT

To Check the Fluid Level

The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir shouldbe checked periodically. The level should bebetween the "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at or below the"MIN" mark, carefully add fluid to bring it up to"MAX". Do not overfill.

HGK5012

CHECKING THE BRAKES

G120A01A-AAT

CAUTION:Because brakes are essential to the safeoperation of the car, it is suggested thatthey be checked and inspected by yourHyundai dealer. The brakes should bechecked and inspected for wear at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle mainte-nance schedule in Section 5.

!!

G120B01A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level

WARNING:Use caution when handling brake fluid. Itcan damage your vision if it gets into youreyes. It will also damage your vehicle’spaint if spilled on it and not removed imme-diately.


15CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID

G130A01S-AAT

To Check the Clutch Fluid

The clutch fluid level in the master cylindershould be checked when performing other un-der hood services. The system should bechecked for leakage at the same time.Check to make certain that the clutch fluid levelis always between the "MAX" and "MIN" levelmarkings on the fluid reservoir. Fill as required.Fluid loss indicates a leak in the clutch systemwhich should be inspected and repaired imme-diately. Consult your Hyundai dealer.

HGK5013To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirt, thenunscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowly pour therecommended fluid into the reservoir. Do notoverfill. Carefully replace the cap on the reser-voir and tighten.

G120E02A-AAT

Adding Brake Fluid

! WARNING:Handle brake fluid carefully. It can damageyour vision if it gets into your eyes. Use onlyDOT 3 or DOT 4 specification fluid from asealed container. Do not allow the fluid canor reservoir to remain open any longer thanrequired. This will prevent entry of dirt andmoisture which can damage the brake sys-tem and cause improper operation. !

G130B02A-AAT

To Replace the Fluid

Recommended brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or DOT 4 specification should be used. Thereservoir cap must be fully tightened to avoidcontamination from foreign matter or moisture.

NOTE:Do not allow any other liquids to contami-nate the brake fluid. Seal damage will result.

WARNING:Use caution when handling brake fluid. Itcan damage your vision if you get it in youreyes. It will also damage your vehicle’spaint if spilled on it and not removed imme-diately.


16 CHANGING THE CLIMATE CON-TROL AIR FILTER

G145A03GK-GAT

(In front of blower unit) (If installed)

The climate control air filter is located in front ofthe evaporator unit behind the glove box.It helps to decrease the amount of pollutantsentering the car.

1. Remove the mounting screws on the down-side of the glove box.

OGK076020

AIR CONDITIONING CARE

G140A01A-AAT

Keeping the Condenser Clean

The air conditioning condenser (and engineradiator) should be checked periodically foraccumulation of dirt, dead insects, leaves, etc.These can interfere with maximum cooling ef-ficiency. When removing such accumulations,brush or hose them away carefully to avoidbending the cooling fins.

!

G140C01A-AAT

Lubrication

To lubricate the compressor and the seals in thesystem, the air conditioning should be run for atleast 10 minutes each week. This is particularlyimportant during cool weather when the airconditioning system is not otherwise in use.

G140B01A-AAT

Checking the Air Conditioning Opera-tion

1. Start the engine and let it run at a fast idle forseveral minutes with the air conditioning setat the maximum cold setting.

2. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents isnot cold, have the air conditioning systeminspected by your Hyundai dealer.

CAUTION:Running the air conditioning system forextended periods of time with a low refrig-erant level may damage the compressor.


17

2. Open the glove box and remove the mount-ing screws on the upside of the glove box.

3. Remove the filter cover.OGK076021 HGK2114

4. Replace the climate control air filter with anew one.

5. Installation is the reverse order of disassem-bly.

HGK2115

CAUTION:Be sure to install the climate control air filterin the direction of the arrow sign. Other-wise, it may cause noise or deterioration.

!


18

G200B02A-AAT

Replacing Accessory Fuse

The fuse box for the lights and other electricalaccessories will be found low on the dashboardon the driver’s side. Inside the box you will finda list showing the circuits protected by eachfuse.If any of your car’s lights or other electricalaccessories stop working, a blown fuse couldbe the reason. If the fuse has burned out, youwill see that the metal strip inside the fuse hasburned through. If you suspect a blown fuse,follow this procedure:

OGK076027

CHECKING AND REPLACINGFUSES

G200A01GK-AAT

Replacing a Fusible Link

A fusible link will melt if the electrical circuits fromthe battery are ever overloaded, thus prevent-ing damage to the entire wiring harness. (Thiscould be caused by a short in the systemdrawing too much current.) If this ever happens,have a Hyundai dealer determine the cause,repair the system and replace the fusible link.The fusible links are located in a relay box(2.0L)or below the positive (+) post cover of thebattery (2.7L) for easy inspection.

G200A01E

GoodBad

! CAUTION:When replacing a fusible link, never useanything but a new fusible link with thesame or lower amperage rating. Never usea piece of wire or a higher-rated fusible link.This could result in serious damage andcreate a fire hazard.


19

! CAUTION:A burned-out fuse indicates that there is aproblem in the electrical circuit. If you re-place a fuse and it blows as soon as theaccessory is turned on, the problem isserious and should be referred to a Hyundaidealer for diagnosis and repair. Never re-place a fuse with anything except a fusewith the same or a lower amperage rating.A higher capacity fuse could cause damageand create a fire hazard.

G200B02L

Good Burned out

1. Turn off the ignition and all other switches.2. Open the fuse box and examine each fuse.

Remove each fuse by pulling it toward you(a small "fuse puller" tool is contained in thefuse box to simplify this operation).

3. Be sure to check all other fuses, even if youfind one that appears to have burned out.

HXDFL1026-1

4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing a newfuse of the same rating into place. The fuseshould be a snug fit. If it is not, have the fuseclip repaired or replaced by a Hyundai dealer.If you do not have a spare fuse, you may beable to borrow a fuse of the same or lowerrating from an accessory you can tempo-rarily get along without (the radio or cigarettelighter, for example). Always remember toreplace the borrowed fuse.

NOTE:See page 6-39 for the fuse panel descrip-tions.

CHECKING THE BATTERY

!

G210A01A-AAT

WARNING:Batteries can be dangerous! When workingwith batteries, carefully observe the follow-ing precautions to avoid serious injuries.

The fluid in the battery contains a strong solutionof sulfuric acid, which is poisonous and highlycorrosive. Be careful not to spill it on yourself orthe car. If you do spill battery fluid on yourself,immediately do the following:

OGK076026


20

! WARNING:Always read the following in-structions carefully when han-dling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and allother flames or sparks away fromthe battery.

Hydrogen, which is a highly com-bustible gas, is always present inbattery cells and may explode ifignited.

Keep batteries out of the reach ofchildren because batteries con-tain highly corrosive SULFURICACID. Do not allow battery acidto contact your skin, eyes, cloth-ing or paint finish.

If any electrolyte gets into youreyes, flush your eyes with cleanwater for at least 15 minutes andget immediate medical attention.If possible, continue to applywater with a sponge or cloth untilmedical attention is received.

o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush theaffected areas with water for at least 15minutes and then seek medical assistance.

o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse out youreyes with water and get medical assistanceas soon as possible. While you are beingdriven to get medical assistance, continue torinse your eyes by using a sponge or softcloth saturated with water.

o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a largequantity of water or milk followed by milk ofmagnesia, eat a raw egg or drink vegetableoil. Get medical assistance as soon aspossible.

While batteries are being charged (either by abattery charger or by the vehicle’s generator),they produce explosive gases. Always ob-serve these warnings to prevent injuries fromoccurring:

o Charge batteries only in a well ventilatedarea.

o Do not permit flames, sparks or smoking inthe area.

o Keep children away from the area.

!

G210B03A-AAT

Checking the Battery

Keep the battery clean. Any evidence of corro-sion around the battery posts or terminalsshould be removed using a solution of house-hold baking soda and warm water. After thebattery terminals are dry, cover them with a lightcoating of grease.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-sories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the state of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Batteries also contain other chemicalsknown to the state of California to causecancer. Wash hands after handling.


21

!

CHECKING ELECTRIC COOLINGFANS

!G220A01A-AAT

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the coolant fan, so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contactedarea.If you feel a pain or a burningsensation, get medical attentionimmediately.

Wear eye protection when charg-ing or working near a battery.Always provide ventilation whenworking in an enclosed space.

o When lifting a plastic-cased battery, ex-cessive pressure on the case may causebattery acid to leak, resulting in personalinjury. Lift with a battery carrier or withyour hands on opposite corners.

o Never attempt to charge the battery whenthe battery cables are connected.

o The electrical ignition system works withhigh voltage.Never touch these components with theengine running or the ignition switchedon.

WARNING:

G220C01A-AAT

Checking Condenser Cooling Fan

The condenser coolant fan should come onautomatically whenever the air conditioning is inoperation.

G220B01A-AAT

Checking Engine Cooling Fan

The engine cooling fan should come on auto-matically if the engine coolant temperature ishigh.

POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL

G230A04A-AAT

The power steering fluid level should be checkedregularly. To check the power steering fluidlevel, be sure the engine is "OFF", then checkto make certain that the power steering fluidlevel is between the "MAX" and "MIN" levelmarkings on the fluid reservoir.

NOTE:o Grinding noise from the power steering

pump may be heard immediately afterthe engine is started in extremely coldconditions (below - 4°F). If the noisestops during warm up, there is no abnor-mal function in the system. It is due to apower steering fluid characteristic inextremely cold conditions.

o Do not start the engine when the powersteering oil reservoir is empty.

HGK5011


22

G240A01A-AAT

Power Steering Hoses

It is suggested that you check the power steer-ing hose connections for fluid leakage at regularintervals. The power steering hoses should bereplaced if there is severe surface cracking,scuffing or worn spots. Deterioration of the hosecould cause premature failure.

FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUTYOUR HYUNDAI

G250A01A-AAT

If you desire additional information about main-taining and servicing your Hyundai, you maypurchase a factory Shop Manual at your Hyundaidealer's parts department. This is the samemanual used by dealership technicians andwhile it is highly technical it can be useful inobtaining a better understanding of your car andhow it works.

HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT

G290A04GK-AAT

Before performing aiming adjustment, makesure of the following.

OGK076067N

Vertical aiming


23

G290B02GK-AAT

Adjustment After Headlight AssemblyReplacement

If the vehicle has had front body repair and theheadlight assembly has been replaced, theheadlight aiming should be checked using anaiming screen as shown in the illustration. Turnon the headlight switch.1. Adjust headlights so that main axis of light is

parallel to center line of the body and isaligned with point "P" shown in the illustration.

2. Dotted lines in the illustration show the centerof headlights.

G290B01HR-1A

L

W

H

H

Cut-off line

Ground line

Horizontal line

Vertical line

!

1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct pressure.2. Place the vehicle on level ground and press

the front bumper & rear bumper down sev-eral times. Place vehicle at a distance of 118in. (3m) from the test wall.

3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except forfull levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, andspare tire, jack, and tools).

4. Clean the head light lenses and turn on theheadlights.

5. Open the hood.6. Draw the vertical line (through the center of

each headlight beam pattern) and the hori-zontal line (through the center of each head-light beam pattern) on the aiming screen.

7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to theparallel line with a phillips screwdriver -VERTICAL AIMING.

WARNING:Never attempt to adjust the horizontal align-ment of your headlights. Horizontal aimingmust be adjusted by an authorized Hyundaidealer to avoid incorrect alignment that willreduce the effectiveness of your headlights.

SPECIFICATION:"H"Horizontal center line of headlights from ground:Low Beam: 27.2 in. (690mm)High Beam: 26.5 in. (672mm)

"W"Distance between each headlight center :Low Beam: 52.6 in. (1,336mm)High Beam: 43.2 in. (1,098mm)

"L"Distance between the headlights and the wallthat the lights are tested against : 118 in. (3,000mm)


24

OGK076047

5. Turn the plastic cover counterclockwiseand remove it.

G270A01GK-AAT

Headlight and Front Turn Signal Light

1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye protection.2. Open the engine hood.3. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic base,

avoid touching the glass.

4. Disconnect the power cord from the bulbbase in the back of the headlight.

OGK076066N

REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT BULBS

!

G260A01MC-AAT

Before attempting to replace a light bulb, be surethe switch is turned to the "OFF" position.The next paragraph shows how to reach thelight bulbs so they may be changed. Be sure toreplace the burned-out bulb with one of thesame number and wattage rating.See page 6-27 for the wattage descriptions.

CAUTION:o Keep the lamps out of contact with

petroleum products, such as oil, gaso-line, etc.

o If you don't have necessary tools, thecorrect bulbs and the expertise, consultyour authorized Hyundai dealer.

OGK076048

6. Disconnect the connector from the bulbbase in the back of the headlight.


25

8. Remove the protective cap from the re-placement bulb and install the new bulb bymatching the plastic base with the headlighthole. Reattach the bulb spring and recon-nect the connector.

9. Use the protective cap and carton to prompt-ly dispose of the old bulb.

10.Check for proper headlight aim.

OGK076050OGK076049

7. Push the bulb spring to remove the headlightbulb.

OGK076052

11.To replace the front turn signal light bulb,remove from the bulb holder and install thenew bulb.


26

! WARNING:This halogen bulb contains gas under pres-sure and if impacted could shatter, result-ing in flying fragments. Always wear eyeprotection when servicing the bulb. Protectthe bulb against abrasions or scratchesand against liquids when lighted. Turn thebulb on only when installing in a headlight.Replace the headlight if damaged or cracked.Keep the bulb out of the reach of childrenand dispose of the used bulb with care.

G270A03O

G270B02GK-GAT

Rear Combination Light(Without woofer speaker)

1. Open the tail gate.

G270K01CM-GAT

Front Fog Light (If Installed)

NOTE:It is recommended that the front fog lightbulb be replaced by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

OGK076037

(1)(2)

(3) (1)

(4)


27

OGK076041

3. Remove the nut (8mm) with a socket wrench.4. To detach the rear combination light tap it

strongly with your hand.5. To replace the rear combination light (stop/

tail light, back-up light, turn signal light, sidemark light), take it out from the bulb holder byturning it counterclockwise.

6. Install the new bulb.

(1) Stop/Tail light(2) Back-up light(3) Turn signal light(4) Side mark light

OGK0760422. To remove the cover of the rear luggage trim,turn the knobs by hand to the counterclock-wise.

OGK076040


28

2. Take off the luggage board.

HGK5038

G275B02GK-GAT

Rear Combination Light(With woofer speaker)

1. Open the tail gate.

OGK076039

3. Extract the mounting screws (10mm) aroundthe woofer speaker with a socket wrench.

4. Disconnect the power cord from the wooferspeaker.

OGK076037

(1)(2)

(3) (1)

(4)


29

8. To replace the rear combination light (stop/tail light, back-up light, turn signal light, sidemark light), take it out from the bulb holder byturning it counterclockwise.

9. Install the new bulb.

(1) Stop/Tail light(2) Back-up light(3) Turn signal light(4) Side mark light

OGK076040

5. To remove the cover of the rear luggae trim,turn the knob by hand to the counterclock-wise.

OGK076041

6. Remove the nut (8mm) with a socket wrench.

OGK076042

7. To detach the rear combination light tap itstrongly with your hand.


30

3. Disconnect the power cord.

HGK5046

OGK076032

G270C01GK-AAT

Luggage Compartment Light

1. Open the tail gate.2. Remove the cover with a flat-blade screw-

driver.

OGK076035

4. Replace with a new bulb.

G270G01GK-AAT

Map Light

OGK076046

1. Remove the cover with a flat-blade screw-driver.

2. Replace with a new bulb.


31

3. Remove the glove box by pulling strongly.

CAUTION:Be careful not to damage the glove boxwhen pulling the glove box.

!

OGK076022OGK076021

2. Open the glove box and remove the mount-ing screws on the upside of the glove box.

G270H01GK-GAT

Glove Box Illuminated Light

1. Remove the mounting screws on the down-side of the glove box.

OGK076020


32

OGK076038

Clip

Power Cord

4. Disconnect the power cord.5. Remove the glove box illuminated light by

pushing the clip.6. Replace with a new bulb.

G270E02A-GAT

Side Repeater (If Installed)NOTE:It is recommended that the side repeaterbulb be replaced by an authorized Hyundaidealer.


33

Part Name

Luggage Compartment Light

High Mounted Rear

Stop Light

Rear

Combination

Light

License Plate Light

BULB WATTAGE

G280A04GK-AAT

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Part Name

Head Light (Low)

Front Position Light

Map Light

Front Turn Signal Light

Front Fog Light (If installed)

Head Light (High)

Front Side Marker Light

Side Repeater

Front Door Edge Warning Light

Wattage

55

8

10

28

51

55

5

5

5

No.

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Wattage

5

2.4 (LED)

3.5 (LED)

16

5

27

27/8

5

OGK066009N

Socket type

PGJ 19-2

BAY15d

W2.1 X 9.5D

BAY15d

P22d

Px26d

W2.1 X 9.5d

W2.1 X 9.5d

W2.1 X 9.5d

With spoiler

Without spoiler

Back-up Light

Rear Side Marker Light

Turn Signal Light

Stop/Tail Light

Socket type

S8.5 / 8.5

W2.1 X 9.5d

-

W2.1 X 9.5d

BA15s

BA15s

BAY15d

W2.1 X 9.6d


34 FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

G200C01GK-GAT

Engine Compartment

If installedNOTE:Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect thefuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

HGK4005


35

PROTECTED COMPONENTS

Generator(2.0L)

BCM BOX(Tail lamp relay,Power connector,Fuse(2,7,12,13,19,20,24)

Condenser fan relay

Radiator fan relay

Engine control relay, Fuel pump relay, A/T control relay,

Generator, PCM(2.0L)

Ignition switch,Start relay

ABS/ESC control module,ESC Air bleeding connector

ABS/ESC control module,ESC Air bleeding connector

Blower relay

Injector

Oxygen sensor,Camshaft position sensor, Idle speed control actuator

DRL control module

Front fog lamp relay

TCM(2.7L),ECM(2.7L)

Horn relay,A/C relay

Head lamp relay(High)

Head lamp relay(Low)

FUSERATING

120A

50A

30A

30A

30A

30A

40A

40A

30A

15A

10A

15A

15A

10A

15A

15A

15A

DESCRIPTION

BATT

BATT

COND

RAD

ECU

IGN

ABS 1

ABS 2

BLOWER

INJ

SNSR

DRL

F/FOG

ECU

HORN,A/CON

H/LP (HI)

H/LP (LO)


36

G200D02GK-GAT

Inner Panel

OGK066010L


37

DESCRIPTIONIG COIL

AMPB/UP LAMPA/BAG IND

A/BAGHTD MIRHAZARDR/WIPERTAIL-RHF/WIPER

RR DEFOGSTOP

TAIL-LHA/CONECU

CLUSTERROOM LP

P/WINDOWT/GATE

IGNRR FOGC/LIGHTS/ROOFS/HTRABS

AUDIO

PROTECTED COMPONENTSIgnition coil(2.7L), Electronic chrome mirrorAMPBack-up lamp switch,Transaxle range switch,Cruise control module,Cluster R postionInstrument cluster (A/BAG IND.)SRS control module, S/Buckle DRV, ASSMirror defoggerHazard relayRear wiper motor,Rear intermittent wiper relayRight tail lamps,Glove box lamp, Room lamp, C/Light tailFront wiper motor,Front wiper relayDefogger relayStop lamp switch,Burglar alarm horn relay,Folding/Unfolding rely, TPMSLeft tail lampsA/C control module, Blower relay, Sun roof, Ambieut DisplayECM, Multi gauge unit, TCM, Vehicle speed sensor, TPMSInstrument cluster (Power), Per-excitation resister, DRL Control module,GeneratorRoom lamp,Clock,Audio,Data link connector,Multi gauge unit, Cluster, A/ConPower window relayTrunk lid switchAQS sensor,Head lamp relay,DRL Control moduleRear fog lampCigarette lighter,Outside mirror switchSunroof,Power door lock/Unlock relaySeat warmerESC/ABS control moduleAudio,Digital clock

FUSERATING20A20A10A10A15A10A10A15A10A20A30A15A10A10A10A10A10A30A15A10A10A15A15A20A10A10A

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

7Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3

7

gkflhma-7.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM1

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

2 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

H010D01A-AAT

3. Exhaust Emission Control System

The Exhaust Emission Control System is ahighly effective system which controls exhaustemissions while maintaining good vehicle per-formance.

H010B01A-AAT

1. Crankcase Emission ControlSystem

The Positive Crankcase Ventilation System isemployed to prevent air pollution caused byblow-by gases being emitted from the crank-case. This system supplies fresh filtered air tothe crankcase through the air intake hose.Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes withblow-by gases, which then pass through thePCV valve and into the induction system.

H010A03GK-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an emissioncontrol system to meet all requirements of theU.S. Environmental Protection Agency or Cali-fornia Air Resources Board.There are three emission control systems whichare as follows.

1) Crankcase Emission Control System2) Evaporative Emission Control System3) Exhaust Emission Control System

In order to ensure the proper function of theemission control systems, it is recommendedthat you have your car inspected and main-tained by an authorized Hyundai dealer in ac-cordance with the maintenance schedule in thismanual.

Caution for the Inspection and MaintenanceTest (Vehicle with Electronic Stability Con-trol)

o To prevent the vehicle from misfiringduring dynamometer testing, discon-nect the ABS connector located insideof the wheel guard (driver side).

o For more information, see shop manual(BR Group, Wheel Speed Sensor).

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank areabsorbed and stored in the onboard canister.When the engine is running, the fuel vaporsabsorbed in the canister are drawn into theinduction system through the purge controlsolenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is controlledby the Engine Control Module (ECM); when theengine coolant temperature is low during idling,the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is nottaken into the engine. After the engine warms-up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens tointroduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

H010C01S-AAT

2. Evaporative Emission Control (Includ-ing ORVR: Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery) System

The Evaporative Emission Control System isdesigned to prevent fuel vapors from escapinginto the atmosphere.(The ORVR system is designed to allow thevapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into acanister while refueling at the gas station, pre-venting the escape of fuel vapors into theatmosphere.)

gkflhma-7.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM2

7EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

3CATALYTIC CONVERTER

H020A01A-AAT

All Hyundai vehicles are equipped with a mono-lith type three-way catalytic converter to re-duce the carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons andnitrogen oxides contained in the exhaust gas.Exhaust gases passing through the catalyticconverter may cause it to operate at a very hightemperature. The introduction of large amountsof unburned gasoline into the exhaust maycause the catalytic converter to overheat andcreate a fire hazard. This risk may be reducedby observing the following:

Catalytic Converter

! WARNING:o Use unleaded fuel only.o Maintain the engine in good operating

condition. Extremely high catalytic con-verter temperatures can result from im-proper operation of the electrical, igni-tion or multiport electronic fuel injec-tion.

o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks, or ishard to start, have your Hyundai dealerinspect and repair the problem as soonas possible.

o Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.Running out of gasoline may cause theengine to misfire and result in damage tothe catalytic converter.

o Avoid idling the engine for periodslonger than 10 minutes.

o The vehicle should not be pushed orpulled to get started. This may cause thecatalytic converter to overheat and cre-ate a fire hazard.

o Do not touch the catalytic converter orany other part of the exhaust systemwhile the catalytic converter is hot. Shutoff the engine, wait for at least one hourbefore touching the catalytic converteror any other part of the exhaust system.

o Remember that your Hyundai dealer isyour best source of assistance.

o Do not stop your Hyundai over any com-bustible material such as grass, paper,leaves or rags. These materials mightcontact the hot catalytic converter and afire might result.

OGK076501

gkflhma-7.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM3

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............................. 8-2Engine Number ............................................................. 8-2Recommended Inflation Pressures ............................... 8-3Tire Sidewall Labeling ................................................... 8-5Tire Terminology and Definitions ................................... 8-7Snow Tires .................................................................... 8-9Tire Chains.................................................................. 8-10Tire Rotation................................................................ 8-10Tire Balancing ............................................................. 8-11Tire Traction ................................................................ 8-11When to Replace Tires ............................................... 8-12Spare Tire and Tools ................................................... 8-13Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle .......................... 8-13Consumer Information ................................................. 8-13Reporting Safety Defects ............................................ 8-17Binding Arbitration of Warranty Claims ....................... 8-17

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTINGSAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING

ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

88

gkflhma-8.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM1

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

2 ENGINE NUMBERVEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN)

I010B01A-AATI010A01A-AAT

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is thenumber used in registering your car and in alllegal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. Itcan be found in three different places on yourcar:

1. On the bulkhead between the engine andpassenger compartments.

2. On the left top side of the instrument panelwhere it can be seen by looking down throughthe windshield.

3. On the lower side of the center pillar outerpanel.

The engine number is stamped on the engineblock as shown in the drawing.

OGK086100L

TIRES

I020A02A-AAT

Tire Information

The tires supplied on your new Hyundaiare chosen to provide the best perfor-mance for normal driving.If you ever have questions about yourtire warranty and where to obtain ser-vice, see the tire manufacture's bookletincluded with your vehicle's Owner'sManual Literature Kit.

I010B01B

2.7L

HFO6003

2.0L

gkflhma-8.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM2

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

3

I030A03JM-AAT

Recommended Cold Tire InflationPressures

Tire label located on the driver's side ofthe center pillar outer panel gives thecold tire pressures recommended foryour vehicle with the original tire size,the number of people that can be in yourvehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

These pressures were chosen to pro-vide the most satisfactory combinationof ride comfort, tire wear and stabilityunder normal conditions. Tire pressuresshould be checked at least monthly.Proper tire inflation pressures shouldbe maintained for these reasons:

HGK6003

I030A03GK1

Type A

I030A03GK2

Type B

I030A03GK3

Type C

gkflhma-8.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM3


4

!

NOTE:o Underinflation also results in ex-

cessive wear, poor handling andreduced fuel economy. Wheel de-formation also is possible. Keepyour tire pressures at the properlevels. If a tire frequently needsrefilling, have it checked by yourHyundai Dealer.

o Overinflation produces a harshride, excessive wear at the centerof the tire tread, and a greaterpossibility of damage from roadhazards.

WARNING:Overinflation or underinflation canreduce the tire life, adversely affectvehicle handling, and lead to sud-den tire failure. This could rusult inloss of vehicle control and potentialinjury.

CAUTION:Always observe the following:

o Check pressures when the tiresare cold. (After the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least three hoursor hasn't been driven more than 1mile (1.6 km) since starting up.)

o Check the pressure of your sparetire each time you check the pres-sure of other tires.

o Worn, old tires can cause acci-dents. If your tread is badly worn,or if your tires have been dam-aged, replace them.

!!WARNING:

o Inspect your tires frequently forproper inflation as well as wearand damage. Always use a tirepressure gauge.

o Tires with too much or too littlepressure wear unevenly causingpoor handling, loss of vehiclecontrol, and sudden tire failureleading to accidents, injuries, andeven death. The recommendedcold tire pressure for your vehiclecan be found in this manual andon the tire label located on thedriver's side of the center pillar.

o Worn tires can cause accidents.Replace tires that are worn, showuneven wear, or are damaged.

o Remember to check the pressureof your spare tire. Hyundai recom-mends that you check the spareevery time you check the pressureof the other tires on your vehicle.

gkflhma-8.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM4


5

sary. If the pressure is low, add air untilyou reach the recommended amount.If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve. Recheck the tire pres-sure with the tire gage. Be sure to putthe valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

I035A01JM-AAT

Checking Tire Inflation Pressure

Check your tires once a month or more.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

How to Check

Use a good quality gage to check tirepressure. You can not tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by lookingat them. Radial tires may look properlyinflated even when they're underinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. - "Cold" means yourvehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1mile (1.6 km).Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gage firmlyonto the valve to get a pressure mea-surement. If the cold tire inflation pres-sure matches the recommended pres-sure on the tire and loading informationlabel, no further adjustment is neces-

Federal law requires tire manufacturersto place standardized information onthe sidewall of all tires. This informationidentifies and describes the fundamen-tal characteristics of the tire and alsoprovides the tire identification number(TIN) for safety standard certification.The TIN can be used to identify the tirein case of a recall.

I030B01GK-GAT

Tire Sidewall Labeling

I030B04JM

1

23

4

5, 6

7

1

gkflhma-8.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM5


6

1. Manufacturer or Brand nameo Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.2. Tire size

(example: P215/45R17 87V)o The "P" indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles.A "T" is the designation for a tem-porary spare tire.

o Three-digit number (215): This num-ber gives the width in millimetersof the tire from sidewall edge tosidewall edge.

o Two-digit number (45): This num-ber, known as the aspect ratio,gives the tire's ratio of height towidth.

o R: The "R" stands for radial.o Two-digit number (17): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter ininches.

o Two digit number (87): This num-ber is the tire's load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support.

o V: Speed Rating. The speed ratingdenotes the speed at which a tire isdesigned to be driven for extendedperiods of time. The ratings rangefrom "A" to "Z" (98 to 186 MPH).

3. TIN (Tire Identification Number) fornew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)o DOT: Abbreviation for the "Depart-

ment of Transportation". The sym-bol can be placed above, below orto the left or right of the Tire Identification Number. Indicates tire isin compliance with the U.S. De-partment of Transportation MotorVehicle Safety Standards.

o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer'sidentification mark

o 2nd two-digit code: Tire sizeo 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)o 4th four-digit code: Date of Manu-

facture

o Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. Forexample, the numbers 3105 meansthe 31st week of 2005.

4. Tire ply composition and materialThe number of layers or plies ofrubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which in-clude steel, nylon, polyester, andothers. The letter "R" means radialply construction; the letter "D" meansdiagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter "B" means belted-biasply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressureThis number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflation pres-sure.

gkflhma-8.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM6


7

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

7. Uniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required tograde tires based on three perfor-mance factors: treadwear, tractionand temperature resistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform Tire Qual-ity Grading on page 8-14.

I030D01JM-AAT

TIRE TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINI-TIONS

Air Pressure: The amount of air insidethe tire pressing outward on the tire. Airpressure is expressed in pounds persquare inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional accesso-ries. Some examples of optional ac-cessories are, automatic transmission,power seats, and air conditioning.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords thatis located between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made from steel orother reinforcing materials.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords that holdthe tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in whichthe plies are laid at alternate anglesless than 90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of airpressure in a tire, measured in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascals(kPa) before a tire has built up heat fromdriving.Curb Weight: This means the weight ofa motor vehicle with standard and op-tional equipment including the maxi-mum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant,but without passengers and cargo.DOT Markings: A code molded into thesidewall of a tire signifying that the tireis in compliance with the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation motor vehiclesafety standards. The DOT code in-cludes the Tire Identification Number(TIN), an alphanumeric designator whichcan also identify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand and date ofproduction.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Ratingfor the front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Ratingfor the rear axle.

gkflhma-8.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM7


8

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The sideof an asymmetrical tire, that must al-ways face outward when mounted on avehicle.Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Load Index: An assigned number rang-ing from 1 to 279 that corresponds tothe load carrying capacity of a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which a coldtire may be inflated. The maximum airpressure is molded onto the sidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The load rat-ing for a tire at the maximum permis-sible inflation pressure for that tire.Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: The num-ber of occupants a vehicle is designedto seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68kg).

Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The side ofa asymmetrical tire that has a particularside that faces outward when mountedon a vehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bears white letter-ing or bears manufacturer, brand and ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire usedon passenger cars and some light dutytrucks and multipurpose vehicles.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure and shown on thetire placard.Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Rim: A metal support for a tire and uponwhich the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire betweenthe tread and the bead.Speed Rating: An alphanumeric codeassigned to a tire indicating the maxi-mum speed at which a tire can operate.Traction: The friction between the tireand the road surface. The amount ofgrip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire that comesinto contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,sometimes called "wear bars," that showacross the tread of a tire when only 2/32inch of tread remains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards, a tire information systemthat provides consumers with ratingsfor a tire's traction, temperature andtreadwear. Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers using governmenttesting procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire.

gkflhma-8.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM8


9

I040A01S-AAT

Snow Tires

If you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size and havethe same load capacity as the originaltires. Snow tires should be installed onall four wheels; otherwise, poor han-dling may result.Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)more air pressure than the pressurerecommended for the standard tires onthe tire label on the driver side centerpillar outer panel or up to the maximumpressure shown on the tire sidewallwhichever is less.Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120km/h) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The numberof designated seating positions multi-plied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the ratedcargo and luggage loadVehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire due to curband accessory weight plus maximumoccupant and cargo weight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:That load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessoryweight, and normal occupant weightand driving by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanentlyattached to a vehicle showing the origi-nal equipment tire size and recom-mended inflation pressure

I040B01JM-AAT

All Season Tires

Hyundai specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good perfor-mance for use all year round, includingsnowy and icy road conditions. All sea-son tires are identified by ALL SEASONand/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tiresidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than all season tires an may bemore appropriate in some areas.

I040C01JM-AAT

Summer Tires

Hyundai specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior performanceon dry roads. Summer tire performanceis substantrally reduced in snow and ice.Summer tires do not have the tire trac-tion rating M+S (Mud and Snow) on thetire side wall. if you plan to operate yourvehicle in snowy or icy conditions.Hyundai recommends the use of snowtires or all season tires on all four wheels.

gkflhma-8.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM9


10

I060A03GK-AAT

Tire Rotation!I050A04GK-AAT

Tire Chains

Tire chains, if necessary, should beinstalled on the front wheels. Be surethat the chains are installed in accor-dance with the manufacturer's instruc-tions. Refer to the following informa-tion.

WARNING:o When driving on roads covered

with snow or ice, drive at less than20 mph.

o Use the SAE "S" class or wire &plastic chains.

o Don't use a tire chains on a vehicleequipped with aluminium wheels.If it is unavoidable use wire-typechains.

o Use tire chains less than 0.39 in.(10 mm) for 16 inch, and 17 inchtires.

o If you have noise caused by chainscontacting the body, retighten thechain to avoid contact with thevehicle body.

o To prevent body damage, retightenthe chains after driving 0.3~0.6miles.

Tire size

205/55 R 16

215/45 R 17

Snow Chain

Thickness

Max. 0.39 in. (10 mm)

Max. 0.39 in. (10 mm)

To minimize tire and chain wear, do notcontinue to use tire chains when theyare no longer needed.

I060A01TG

I060A02TG

Temporary spare tire type

Full size spare tire type

gkflhma-8.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM10


11

I070A01A-AAT

Tire Balancing

A tire that is out of balance may affecthandling and tire wear. The tires on yourHyundai were balanced before the carwas delivered but may need balancingagain during the years you own the car.Whenever a tire is dismounted for re-pair, it should be rebalanced beforebeing reinstalled on the car.

! WARNING:o Do not use the temporary spare

tire for tire rotation.o Do not mix bias ply and radial ply

tires under any circumstances.This may cause unusual handlingcharacteristics that could result indeath, serious injury, or propertydamage.

Tires should be rotated every 6,000miles (10,000 km). If you notice thattires are wearing unevenly between ro-tations, have the car checked by aHyundai dealer so the cause may becorrected.After rotating, adjust the tire pressuresand be sure to check wheel nut torque.

I080A01A-AAT

Tire Traction

Tire traction can be reduced if you driveon worn tires, tires that are improperlyinflated or on slippery road surfaces.Tires should be replaced when treadwear indicators appear. To reduce thepossibility of losing control, slow downwhenever there is rain, snow or ice onthe road.

gkflhma-8.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM11


12

!!I090A05A-AAT

When to Replace Tires

HGK5015

TWI indicator

0.06 in. (1.6 mm) WARNING:To reduce the chance or serious orfatal injuries from an accident causedby tire failure or loss of vehicle con-trol:o Replace tires that are worn, show

uneven wear, or are damaged.Worn tires can cause loss of brak-ing effectiveness, steering con-trol, and traction.

o Do not drive your vehicle with toolittle or too much pressure in yourtires. This can lead to unevenwear and tire failure.

o When replacing tires, never mixradial and bias-ply tires on thesame car. You must replace alltires (including the spare) if mov-ing from radial to bias-ply tires.

The original tires on your car have treadwear indicators. The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the "TWI"or " " marks, etc., The tread wearindicators appear when the tread depthis 0.06 in. (1.6 mm). The tire should bereplaced when these appear as a solidbar across two or more grooves of thetread. Always replace your tires withthose of the recommended size. If youchange wheels, the new wheel's rimwidth and offset must meet Hyundaispecification.

o Using tires and wheel other thanthe recommended sizes couldcause unusual handling charac-teristics and poor vehicle control,resulting in a serious accident.

o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai'sspecifications may fit poorly andresult in damage to the vehicle orunusual handling and poor ve-hicle control.

o Tires degrade over time, even whenthey are not being used. Regard-less of the remaining tread, it isrecommended that tires tread, It isrecommended that tires generallybe replaced after 6 years of normalservice. Heat caused by not cli-mates or frequent high loadingConditions can accelerate the ag-ing process.

WARNING:

gkflhma-8.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM12


13

! WARNING: !

I090B02JM-AAT

Tire Maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decrease tirewear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly,have your dealer check the wheel align-ment.

When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. This willincrease vehicle ride comfort and tirelife. Additionally, a tire shoud always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel.

WARNING:o Underinflated or overinflated tires

can cause poor handling, loss ofvehicle control, and sudden tirefailure leading to accidents, inju-ries, and even death. Always checktires are properly inflated beforedriving. Refer to pages 2-22 and 8-3 for proper tire pressures andfurther information.

o Driving on tires with no or insuffi-cient tread is dangerous. Worn-out tires can result in loss of ve-hicle control, collisions, and in-jury and even death. Worn-outtires should be replaced as soonas possible and should never beused for driving. Always checktire tread before driving your car.Refer to this page for further infor-mation and tread limits.

SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS

I100A02Y-AAT

Your Hyundai is delivered with the fol-lowing:

Spare tire and wheelWheel nut wrench, Wrench barJack

HGK4008

Failure to follow this Warning canresult in sudden tire failure, whichcould lead to a loss of control andan accident involving serious in-jury or death.

gkflhma-8.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM13


14 CONSUMER INFORMATION

I110A01A-AAT

Shop Manual

A Hyundai Shop Manual is available from yourauthorized Hyundai dealer. It's written for pro-fessional technicians, but is simple enough formost mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

I120A03A-AAT

Please consult your Owner's Handbook &Warranty Information booklet for yourvehicle's specific warranty coverage.

I130A01A-AAT

This consumer information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issued by theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administrationof the U.S. Department of Transportation. Itprovides the purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Hyundai automobiles with infor-mation on uniform tire quality grading. YourHyundai dealer will help answer any questionsyou may have as you read this information.

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAIVEHICLE

gkflhma-8.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM14


15

!

I130B04A-AAT

Tire quality grading

Department of Transportation qualitygrades - All passenger vehicle tiresmust conform to Federal Safety Stan-dards in addition to these grades. Thesequality grades are molded on thesidewall.

Treadwear - The tread wear grade is acomparative rating based on the wearrate of the tire when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, atire graded 150 would wear one and ahalf (1 - 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due to varia-tions in driving habits, service prac-tices and differences in road character-istics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C - The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction per-formance.

WARNING:The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead brak-ing traction tests, and does not in-clude acceleration, cornering, hy-droplaning, or peak traction charac-teristics.

Temperature A, B, C - The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B, andC, representing the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on a speci-fied indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-tained high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive tempera-ture can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required bylaw.

gkflhma-8.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM15


16

I130D04A-AAT

Hyundai motor vehicles are designed and manu-factured to meet or exceed all applicable safetystandards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge youto read and follow all directions in this Owner'sManual, particularly the information under theheadings "NOTE", "CAUTION" and "WARN-ING".

If, after reading this manual, you have anyquestions regarding the operation of your ve-hicle, please contact your nearest HyundaiMotor America Regional Office as listed below:

Eastern Region: Connecticut, Delaware, Maine,Maryland, Massachusetts, New Hampshire,New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvanina, RhodeIsland, Vermont, Virginia, West Virginia.

Eastern Region1100 Cranbury South River RoadJamesburg, NJ 08831(800) 633-5151

Southern Region: Florida, Georgia, North Caro-lina, South Carolina.

Southern Region270 Riverside Parkway, Suite AAustell, GA 30168(800) 633-5151

South Central Region: Alabama, Arkansas,Colorado, Kansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, Mis-souri, New Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee,Texas, Wyoming.

South Central Region1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400Coppell, TX 75019(800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa, Ken-tucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska, NorthDakota, South Dakota, Ohio, Wisconsin.

Central Region1705 Sequoia DriveAurora, Illinois 60506(800) 633-5151

Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona,California, ldaho, Montana, Nevada, Oregon,Texas, Utah, Washington.

Western Region10550 Talbert AvenueP.O.Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850(800) 633-5151

! WARNING:The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded. Exces-sive speed, underinflation, or exces-sive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildupand possible tire failure.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading - Qual-ity grades can be found on the tiresidewall between the tread shoulderand the maximum section width.For example:Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

gkflhma-8.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM16


17REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

I130C02A-AAT

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the National High-way Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingHYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. IfNHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if itfinds that a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in in-dividual problems between you, yourdealer, or HYUNDAI MOTORAMERICA.To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; or writeto: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Sev-enth Street, SW., Washington, DC20590. You can also obtain other infor-mation about motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

I140A01A-AAT

Any claim or dispute you may haverelated to your vehicle's warranty or theduties contemplated under the warranty,including claims related to the refund orpartial refund of your vehicle's purchaseprice (excluding personal injury or prod-uct liability claims), shall be resolvedby binding arbitration. Binding arbitra-tion shall be administered by and throughthe National Arbitration Forum (NAF) orthe American Arbitration Association(AAA), under the Code of Procedure ofthe entity you select.You will not be responsible for payingfiling and hearing fees above $275.00.All other arbitration costs shall be borneby Hyundai Motor America. You are notresponsible to pay any of the costsHyundai incurs.

This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallnot deprive you of any remedies avail-able to you under applicable law. Theparties are waiving their right to seekremedies in court, including the right toa jury trial.This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallbe governed by and interpretedunder the Federal Arbitration Act, 9U.S.C. sections 1-16. Judgment uponany award may be entered in any courthaving jurisdiction.You may revoke this Arbitration Agree-ment by (1) written notice or (2) elec-tronic notice. Written notice must bedelivered (via certified mail) to HyundaiMotor America, Attn: Consumer Af-fairs, 10550 Talbert Avenue, P.O. Box20849, Fountain Valley, CA 92728-0849.Electronic notice must be submitted atthe following website address :h t t p : / / w a r r a n t y - a r b i t r a t i o n .hyundaiUSA.com. Notice must be re-ceived within 90 days after you pur-chase your vehicle.

BINDING ARBITRATION(U.S.A only)

gkflhma-8.p65 9/12/2006, 3:30 PM17

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

9Measurement ................................................................ 9-2Engine ........................................................................... 9-3Lubrication Chart ........................................................... 9-4

9

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

2

J050A01GK-GAT

BRAKE

J030A01GK-AAT

TIRE

J060A01F-AAT

FUEL SYSTEM

J020A01GK-AAT

POWER STEERING

J010A01GK-AAT

MEASUREMENT

173(4395)

69.3(1760)

52.4(1330)

99.6(2530)

59.5(1510)

59.1(1500)

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height (unladen)

Wheel base

Wheel tread Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Type

Wheel free play

Rack stroke

Oil pump type

Rack and pinion

0 ~ 1.18 in.(0 ~ 30 mm)

5.20 in.(132 mm)

Vane type

Liter

55Fuel tank capacity

Option 205/55 R16, 215/45 R17

US.gal

14.5

in.(mm)

Imp.gal

12

Type

Front brake type

Rear brake type

Parking brake

Dual hydraulic with brake booster

Ventilated disc

Solid Disc

Cable

P205/55 R16

215/45 R17

J035A02GK-GAT

SPARE TIRE

Standard

Option

T125/70 R16 (Temporary)

Full size

9VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

3

2.0 L

4-Cyl., In-line DOHC CVVT

82 x 93.5

1,975

1 - 3 - 4 - 2

0.0067 ~ 0.0091 in.(0.17 ~ 0.23 mm)

0.0098 ~ 0.0122 in.(0.25 ~ 0.31 mm )

0.0047 ~ 0.011 in.(0.12 ~ 0.28 mm)

0.0079 ~ 0.015 in.(0.2 ~ 0.38 mm)

700 ± 100

BTDC 8° ± 5°

SPECIFICATION

2.7 L

6-Cyl., V-type DOHC

86.7 x 75

2,656

1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6

AUTO LASH

750 ± 100

BTDC 12° ± 10°

ENGINE

J070A05GK-AAT

ITEMS

Engine Type

Bore x Stroke (mm)

Displacement (cc)

Firing order

Valve clearance

(Cold Engine : 20 ± 5°C)

Idle speed (RPM)

Ignition timing (Base)

For adjusting

For checking

Intake

Exhaust

Intake

Exhaust

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

4

Oil & Grease Standard

HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4)

HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III,

SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP III specification approved

by Hyundai Motor Co..

PSF-3

DOT 3 or DOT 4 equivalent

Ethylene glycol base for aluminium radiator

LUBRICATION CHART

J080A05GK-AAT

API SJ,SL or ABOVE,

ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

SAE 5W-20, 5W-30

SAE 10W-30 [ABOVE 0°F(-18°C)]

Item

Engine Oil

Recommends

Transaxle

Power Steering

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Coolant

Manual

Auto

Q'ty (u.s.qts.) (liter, Imp. qts.)

(Drain and refill)

Engine Oil (with oil filter):

2.0 L :4.2 (4.0, 3.5)

2.7L : 4.76 (4.5, 4.0)

5 speed : 2.27 (2.15, 1.86), 6 speed : 2.32 (2.2, 1.94)

8.2 (7.8, 6.9)

As required

As required

2.0L : 7.4 (7.0, 6.2) 2.7L : 8.5 (8.0, 7.0)

INDEX

1010

10 INDEX

2

AAir Bag ...............................................................................................1-30Air Cleaner Filter ............................................................................... 6-10Air Conditioning

Care .............................................................................................. 6-16Operation ......................................................................................6-16Switch ........................................................................................... 1-90

Antenna .......................................................................................... 1-104Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................................................2-12Ashtray .............................................................................................. 1-65Automatic Transaxle ........................................................................... 2-8Auto Remote Control Switch ............................................................. 1-83

BBattery ..................................................................................... 2-17, 6-19Binding arbitration ..............................................................................8-17Brake

Anti-lock system ..........................................................................2-12Checking the brakes ....................................................................6-14Fluid .............................................................................................. 6-14Practices ......................................................................................2-14

Breaking-In your new Hyundai ...........................................................1-3Bulbs Wattage ...................................................................................6-31

CCalifornia Perchlorate Notice .......................................................... 5-10Care of Cassette tapes .................................................................. 1-125Care of Disc ................................................................................... 1-125Cassette Tape Player Operation (H280) ...................................... 1-108Catalytic Converter .............................................................................7-3

Child Restraint System ......................................................... 1-21 ~ 1-26Cigarette Lighter ................................................................................1-65Climate Control Air Filter ................................................................... 1-86Clutch

Checking fluid ............................................................................... 6-15Combination Light

Auto Light ......................................................................................1-59Headlight flasher ..........................................................................1-60Headlight switch ...........................................................................1-58High-beam switch ........................................................................1-59Lane change signal ...................................................................... 1-58Turn signal operation ................................................................... 1-58

Compact Disc Player Operation(H280, H265, H465) ........................................... 1-110, 1-116, 1-122

Consumer Information ...................................................................... 8-13Cooling Fans ..................................................................................... 6-21Corrosion Protection

Cleaning the interior ....................................................................... 4-5Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion ....................................... 4-2Washing and waxing ...................................................................... 4-3

Cruise Control ...................................................................................1-80

DDefrosting/Defogging ........................................................................1-93Door

Central door lock ............................................................................ 1-6Door locks ...................................................................................... 1-4Front door edge warning light ......................................................1-73Locking, unlocking front door with a key ...................................... 1-5

Drink Holder ......................................................................................1-65

10INDEX

3

DrivingEconomical driving .......................................................................2-15Smooth cornering ......................................................................... 2-16Winter driving ............................................................................... 2-16

EElectronic Stability Control (ESC) .....................................................2-12Emissions Control Systems ............................................................... 7-1Engine

Before starting the engine .............................................................. 2-3Compartment ................................................................................. 6-2Coolant ........................................................................................... 6-7Coolant temperature gauge ......................................................... 1-53If the engine overheats .................................................................. 3-4Number ........................................................................................... 8-2Oil ................................................................................................... 6-5Starting ........................................................................................... 2-5

Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous .................................................. 2-2

FFloor mat Anchor .............................................................................. 1-79Front Fog Light Switch ...................................................................... 1-63Front Seats

Adjustable front seats .................................................................. 1-10Adjustable headrests ................................................................... 1-12Adjusting seatback angle ............................................................. 1-11Adjusting seat forward and rearward .......................................... 1-11Lumbar support control ............................................................... 1-13Seat cushion height adjustment ..................................................1-13

FuelCapacity .........................................................................................9-2Gauge ........................................................................................... 1-52Recommendations ......................................................................... 1-2

Fuel Filler LidRemote release ............................................................................ 1-74

FusesFuse Panel Description ...............................................................6-32

GGeneral Everyday Checks .................................................................6-4Glove box ..........................................................................................1-69

HHazard Warning System ..................................................................1-63Headlight Aiming Adjustment ............................................................6-23Headlight Bulb ....................................................................................6-24Heating and cooling control

Rotary Type .................................................................................1-84Automatic Type ............................................................................ 1-94

High-mounted Rear Stop light ...........................................................1-72Hood Release ....................................................................................1-73Horn ................................................................................................. 1-78

IIgnition Switch ......................................................................................2-3Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ........................................... 1-46Intermittent Wiper ..............................................................................1-61

10 INDEX

4

JJump Starting ......................................................................................3-3

KKeys ................................................................................................... 1-3

If you lose your keys ................................................................... 3-18Positions .........................................................................................2-3

LLubrication Chart ................................................................................. 9-4Luggage Net ......................................................................................1-78

MMaintenance Intervals

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............................... 5-7Maintenance under severe usage conditions ............................... 5-6Scheduled maintenance ................................................................ 5-4Service requirements ....................................................................5-2

Map Light ........................................................................................... 1-68Mirror

Day-night inside rearview ............................................................1-71Outside rear view ......................................................................... 1-70

OOdometer ..........................................................................................1-54

PParking Brake ....................................................................................1-72Power Steering Fluid Level ...............................................................6-22Power Window .................................................................................... 1-9Pre-tensioner Seat Belt .....................................................................1-28

RRear Seats

Before folding the rear seats ....................................................... 1-14Fold down ..................................................................................... 1-15Rear seat entry ............................................................................ 1-13Rear seat positions ...................................................................... 1-14

Rear Window Defroster Switch ........................................................1-63Reporting Safety Defects .................................................................8-17SSeat Belts

3-Point system .............................................................................1-19Adjustable height ..........................................................................1-18Adjusting your seat belt ...............................................................1-21Care of seat belts ......................................................................... 1-18Precautions .................................................................................. 1-16

Speedometer ..................................................................................... 1-53Starting Procedures ............................................................................ 2-5Steering Wheel Tilt Lever ..................................................................1-78Stereo Radio Operation

(H280, H265, H465) ........................................... 1-105, 1-113, 1-119Stereo Sound System .................................................................... 1-102Sun Visor ........................................................................................... 1-77Sunglass Holder ................................................................................1-69Sunroof .............................................................................................. 1-66

TTachometer .......................................................................................1-53Tail Gate ............................................................................................1-76Theft-alarm System ............................................................................ 1-6

10INDEX

5

TiresAll season tires ............................................................................... 8-9Balancing ......................................................................................8-11Chains .......................................................................................... 8-10Changing a flat tire .......................................................................3-11If you have a flat tire ..................................................................... 3-11Information ...................................................................................... 8-2Pressure ......................................................................................... 8-3Replacement ................................................................................8-12Rotation ........................................................................................ 8-10Sidewall labeling ............................................................................. 8-5Snow tires ....................................................................................... 8-9Spare tire ........................................................................................ 3-9Summer tires .................................................................................. 8-9Terminology and definitions ........................................................... 8-7Traction ........................................................................................ 8-11

TowingA trailer (or vehicle) ...................................................................... 2-19Emergency ...................................................................................3-18If your vehicle must be towed ...................................................... 3-16

TransaxleAutomatic ........................................................................................ 2-8Automatic transaxle fluid checking .............................................. 6-13Manual ............................................................................................ 2-6Manual transaxle oil checking .....................................................6-11

Trip Computer ...................................................................................1-55Trip Odometer ...................................................................................1-54

VVehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................................................... 8-2Vehicle Load Limit .............................................................................2-22Vehicle Specification ........................................................................... 9-1Ventilation

Center ventilator ...........................................................................1-84Side ventilator ............................................................................... 1-84

WWarning Lights .................................................................................. 1-48Warranties for Your Hyundai ............................................................8-13Windshield Wiper and Washer .......................................................... 1-60Windshield Wiper Blades ....................................................................6-9

A000A01A-AAT

This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.

OWNER'S I.D.

ORIGINAL OWNER

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

DELIVERY DATE

(Date Sold to Original Retail purchaser)

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

Seoul Korea

Printing: DEC. 20, 2007Publication No.: A2CO-EU7DGPrinted in Korea

SERVICE STATION INFORMATIONFUEL:UNLEADED gasoline onlyPump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

FUEL TANK CAPACITYOriginal, U.S.gal (Imp.gal., liter) 14.5 (12, 55)

TIRE PRESSURE:See the label on the driver side center pillar outer panel.

OTHER TIRE INFORMATION:See pages 8-2 through 8-15.

HOOD RELEASE:Pull handle under left side of dash.

ENGINE OIL:API grade SJ, SL or ABOVE / ILSAC grade GF-3 or ABOVE and fuelefficient oil. Use SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 or 10W-30 if normal temperaturesare above 0°F (-18°C). See page 6-5 or 9-4.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE:HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) Oil levelshould be up to filler-bolt hole in housing beside differential.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE:Apply the parking brake, with the engine running, shift the selector leverthrough all ranges and return to “N” (Neutral) position. Then check the levelof fluid on the dipstick. Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III,DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting the SPIII specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co..

QUICK INDEXo Car will not start ........................................................................ 3-2o Flat tire ...................................................................................... 3-6o Warning light/chime comes on ...................................... 1-36 ~ 1-39o Engine overheats ....................................................................... 3-4o Towing of your vehicle ............................................................. 3-11o Starting the engine ..................................................................... 2-4o Driving tips for first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) ............................ 1-3o Scheduled maintenance ............................................................. 5-4o Reporting safety defects .......................................................... 8-16

Documents

gkflhma-11 · 7. Hazard Warning Switch 8. Outside Temperature Switch 9. Passenger's Air Bag Off Indicator 10. Passenger's Air Bag 11.Fuse Box Relay 12.Hood Release Lever 13.Steering